JP2016209522A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a load of drive means.SOLUTION: Second members (a rocking member 732 and a projecting member 735) are displaced by a first drive motor. In this case, a game machine includes first transmission means for transmitting drive force of the drive motor to the rocking member 732 and second transmission means for transmitting drive force of the drive motor to the projecting member 735. When the first transmission means is set to be a relatively high load, the second transmission means can be set to be a relatively low load. When the first transmission means is set to be a relatively high load, the second transmission means can be set to be a relatively low load. Thus, the load of the drive motor can be dispersed, thus suppressing the load.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 39

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the driving means, the first member and the second member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the first member transmitting the driving force of the driving member to the first member and the second member, respectively. There is known a gaming machine that includes one transmission unit and a second transmission unit and displaces two members (a first member and a second member) by one driving unit (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-53958

  However, the gaming machine described above has a problem that the load on the driving means increases.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the load on the driving means.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a driving means, a first member and a second member displaced by a driving force of the driving means, and the driving to the first member and the second member. First transmission means and second transmission means for respectively transmitting the driving force of the means, wherein the first transmission means includes a first predetermined section in which the first driving force is loaded on the driving means. A first suppression section in which a driving force smaller than the first driving force loaded in the first predetermined section is loaded on the driving means can be formed, and the second transmission means can A second predetermined section in which the second driving force is loaded on the means, and a second suppression section in which a driving force smaller than the second driving force loaded in the second predetermined section is loaded on the driving means , And the first transmission means is the first predetermined In the state of forming a gap, the second transmission means forms the second suppression section in at least a part of the first predetermined section, and the second transmission means forms the second predetermined section, The first transmission means forms the first suppression section in at least a part of the second predetermined section.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section, the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a displacement component upward in the gravity direction. In the first suppression section or the second suppression section, the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity.

  A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, wherein the first transmission means is a rubbing against a cam member rotated by a driving force of the driving means and a peripheral surface of the cam member. A cam friction contact member that is brought into contact with and applies displacement to the first member, and the second transmission means is positioned eccentrically from a main body portion rotated by a driving force of the driving means and a rotation center of the main body portion. A crank member having a pin portion to be moved, and a guide groove in which the pin portion of the crank member slides, and the pin portion slides along the guide groove to impart displacement to the second member. The cam member and the crank member are integrally formed.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the load on the driving means can be suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the load on the driving means can be suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, it is possible to achieve downsizing.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left slide member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left slide member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a right slide member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right slide member. It is a front view of a slide unit. It is a front view of a slide unit. (A) is a front view of the upper unit, and (b) is a rear view of the upper unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an upper unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an upper unit. It is a front view of an upper unit. It is a rear view of an upper unit. It is a front view of a lower unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lower uniting unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a lower unit. It is a front view of a lower unit. It is a front schematic diagram of the drive arm in the retreat rotation position, the horizontal rotation position, the vertical rotation position, and the overhang rotation position. It is a partial expansion front schematic diagram of the drive arm at the time of rotating from a retracting rotation position to an overhanging rotation position. It is a front view of an upper unit and a lower unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a protrusion unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a protrusion unit. It is a front view of a base member and a raising / lowering base. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a raising / lowering base and a rotating member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an elevating base and a rotating member. It is a front view of a raising / lowering base and a rotation member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotating member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rotating member. It is a front view of a rotating member. (A) is a front view of the drive body in the state arrange | positioned in the 1st rotation position, (b) is a front view of the drive body in the state arrange | positioned in the 2nd rotation position. It is a front schematic diagram of a rotating member. It is a front schematic diagram of a rotating member. (A) is a front view of the lifting unit, (b) is a rear view of the lifting unit, and (c) is a side view of the lifting unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a raising / lowering unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a lifting unit. It is a front view of the raising / lowering unit in a 1st state. It is a front view of the raising / lowering unit in a 2nd state. It is a front view of the raising / lowering unit in a 3rd state. It is a rear view of the lifting unit in the first state, It is a rear view of the raising / lowering unit in a 2nd state, It is a rear view of the raising / lowering unit in a 3rd state. (A) is a front view of the transmission member, slide member, and link member in a 1st state, (b) is a front view of the transmission member, slide member, and link member in a 2nd state, (c ) Is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in the third state. It is a front view of the operation unit in the combined state. It is a schematic cross section of the operation | movement unit in the LIV-LIV line | wire of FIG. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of each rotation member of a slide unit, the raising / lowering base of a protrusion unit, and a rotation member. (A) And (b) is a front view of each rotation member of a slide unit, the raising / lowering base of a protrusion unit, and a rotation member. (A) And (b) is a front view of each rotation member of a slide unit, the raising / lowering base of a protrusion unit, and a rotation member. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a slide unit, an upper unit, and a lower unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a slide unit, an upper unit, and a lower unit. (A) is a schematic diagram of a slide unit, an upper unit, and a lower unit when viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIa in FIG. 65 (a), and (b) is a slide unit when viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 65 (b). It is a schematic diagram of an upper unit and a lower unit. (A) is a schematic diagram of a slide unit, an upper unit, and a lower unit when viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIa in FIG. 66 (a), and (b) is a slide unit when viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 66 (b). It is a schematic diagram of an upper unit and a lower unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the slide unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a slide unit. (A) is a rear view of a transmission gear, (b) is a side view of a transmission gear. (A) is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state which the rotation transmission member and the transmission gear meshed, and (b) in the state where the meshing of the rotation transmission member and the transmission gear was cancelled | released It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit front view. (A) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the slide unit along line LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa in FIG. 72 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit along line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb in FIG. 72 (b). It is a disassembled front perspective view of the slide unit in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state which the left rotation transmission rack gear and transmission gear of the main body base member meshed | engaged, (b) is a housing member displaced, and a lower part of a main body base member It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state by which the meshing | engagement of the side 1st rack gear and the transmission gear was cancelled | released. (A) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the slide unit along line LXXVIa-LXXVIa in FIG. 75 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit along line LXXVIb-LXXVIb in FIG. 75 (b). It is a front view of the base member in a 4th embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state which the left rotation transmission rack gear and transmission gear of the base member meshed | engaged, (b) has released the meshing | engagement of the left rotation transmission rack gear and transmission gear of a base member. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state which looked at. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the left slide member in 5th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left slide member. (A) is the schematic diagram which looked at the left slide member in the state before the switching plate was operated, and (b) was a front view of the left slide member in the state after the switching plate was operated. It is a schematic diagram. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the left slide member in 6th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left slide member. (A) is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state before the switching plate is operated, and (b) is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit in the state after the switching plate was operated in front. is there. 84A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line LXXXVa-LXXXVa in FIG. 84A, and FIG. 84B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the slide unit in 7th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit from the front. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit from the front. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit from the front. It is a front view of the slide unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a slide unit. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit from the front. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCIVa-XCIVa in FIG. 93 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 93 (b); FIG. 93C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCIVc-XCIVc in FIG. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the slide unit in 9th Embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left slide member. It is a front view of a slide unit. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa in FIG. 97 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 97 (b); FIG. 97C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc in FIG. 97C. (A) is a front view of the lifting unit in the tenth embodiment, (b) is a rear view of the lifting unit, and (c) is a side view of the lifting unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a raising / lowering unit. It is an operation unit in the combined state. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit taken along line CIIa-CIIa in FIG. 101, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit taken along line CIIb-CIIb in FIG. (A) is a front view of the drive body in the state by which the drive body in 11th Embodiment was arrange | positioned in the 1st rotation position, (b) is the state of the drive body arrange | positioned in the 2nd rotation position. It is a front view of a drive body. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 42, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape 2 that is formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. And an inner frame 4 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 4, the outer frame 2 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two positions on the left and right of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 4 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places on the left and right sides of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the front door is provided with the side on which the hinges 19 are provided as an opening / closing axis. 5 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front door 5 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is disposed on the back side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the periphery of the window portion 5c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 1, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpots or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front door 5 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light-emitting means such as an LED is incorporated, and a display lamp 34 is provided that can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right-side electric decoration part 32, and an adhering space K1 (see FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 5c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76 and 77, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of wood on which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side cannot be seen by the player. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located at an inner position of the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in the above is planted. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 76 (the upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 1 is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state by a lighting state, or whether a pachinko machine 1 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when there is a winning at either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the big hit type if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) in the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning opening 140 It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a normal state, it is a game state in which neither the probability change nor the time is short (the state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability has been increased).

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time during which the first electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than normal. Time is set. When the first electric combination 140a is in an opened state (open state), the first winning combination 140a is compared with a case where the first electric combination 140a is in a closed state (closed state). The ball is ready to win. Therefore, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, Thus, the number of times that the first electric accessory 140a is opened may be changed to be larger than normal. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the first electric accessory is not changed during the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and once. It is also possible to change at least one of the number of times 140a is opened. In addition, during the time of probability change or in a short time, the first electric combination 140a and the second electric combination 82 are opened at the time when the first electric combination 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened or once. The number of hits may not be performed, and only the probability of hitting the second symbol may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 as a trigger (start winning). A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for displaying the symbols in a variable manner, and an LED for variably displaying the second symbols with the passage of the first through gate 66 as a trigger. The 2nd symbol display apparatus (not shown) comprised by these is provided.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66, the second symbol display device alternately displays a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. The variable display to light is performed. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chances for winning in the winning lottery increase, the player can be given many opportunities for the first electric combination 140a of the second winning opening 140 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time reduction.

  In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the second winning a prize opening during the probability change or in the short time may be achieved by other methods such as increasing the probability of winning during the probability change or shortening the time and increasing the opening time or the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is released per hit. When it is in a state where it is easy for the ball to win 140 and the third winning opening, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the first electric combination 140a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured to allow passage of a part of the ball that flows down the game board out of the balls fired on the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passages of the first through gate 66 of the sphere is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and a second symbol hold lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing the ball of the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). . Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 140 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second winning port 140, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( (See FIG. 4), the jackpot lottery is made, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 is also a winning port from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 140 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls that are paid out when a ball is awarded to the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls that are paid out when a ball is awarded to the second prize opening 140, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 140 may be five.

  The first winning combination 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. The first electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Yes. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the sphere to the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a is The open state (enlarged state) is entered, and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 140.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 140a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Furthermore, during the time when the probability is changing or when the time is short, the time during which the first electric accessory 140a is opened also becomes longer than during normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball is won at the first winning port 64 and when the ball is won at the second winning port 140. However, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140a as in the second winning port 140, and the ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 140 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, resulting in a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change and the short time, passing the ball through the first through gate 66 makes it easy for the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 to be in an open state, so that the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 140 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and the first through gate 66 is allowed to pass. Thus, it is advantageous for the player to open the first electric accessory 140a and aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 140.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is being prone to change, shorting, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality (for example, three) of two or more may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64. The left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided an adhering space K1 for adhering a certificate paper, an identification label, etc., and the certificate paper or the like affixed to the adhering space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A sphere that flows down in the game area and has not won any prize opening 63, 64, 65a, 140, 82 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be held (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) at power-on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 441, 475, 476.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 to 9 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

  In FIG. 7, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are retracted to the maximum in the direction away from each other, and the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, the rotation member 730, and the lifting member 820 are respectively in the retracted position. 8, the left slide member 430 is slid to the right slide member 450 side, and the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced to the overhang position from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 9 shows the state where the rotating member 730 and the elevating member 820 are displaced to the overhanging position from the state shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and a slide unit 400, an upper unit 500, a lower unit 600, The protruding unit 700 and the elevating unit 800 are accommodated rotatably.

  The back case 300 includes a bottom wall 301 having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an outer wall 302 standing from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. The bottom wall 301 is formed with an opening 301a having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back of the bottom wall 301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

  The slide unit 400 includes a base member 410 that is rectangular in a front view disposed in an upper portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and an upper end portion of the base member 410 that is slidably displaceable. The left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are provided, and each slide member 430 is independently moved in the left-right direction (base member) on the front side of the opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81) of the rear case 300. The effect of sliding displacement in the longitudinal direction of 410 is formed to be executable.

  In this case, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed so as to be able to come into contact with each other. In this embodiment, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are damaged when they are brought into contact with each other. Suppressing structure is adopted. Details of this structure will be described later.

  A rectangular horizontally long guide member 419 is disposed in a lower part of the opening 301 a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 in a posture parallel to the base member 410, and the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450. Are slid and displaced in the left-right direction, the lower ends of the slide members 430 and 450 are slid and guided between the guide member 419 and the bottom wall portion 301 facing each other. Thereby, it can suppress that the lower end side of each slide member 430,450 shakes in the front-back direction.

  The upper unit 500 includes a base member 510 that is horizontally long when viewed from the front side of the base member 410 in the slide unit 400 and an upper displacement member 530 that is displaceably disposed on the base member 510. On the other hand, the lower unit 600 includes a base member 610 having a substantially L shape in front view disposed on the left side and lower side of the opening 301a in the bottom wall 301 of the back case 300, and the lower base member 610 And a lower displacement member 640 disposed to be displaceable.

  The upper displacement member 530 is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position retracted to the back side of the base member 510 and an overhanging position projecting to the front side of the opening 301 a of the rear case 300, and the lower displacement member 640. Is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position retracted to the front side of the base member 610 and an extended position projecting to the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300, and the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are formed. When projecting to the projecting position, the side surfaces (the upper contact portion 533 and the lower contact portion 643) of both the displacement members 530 and 640 are brought into contact with (combined with) each other.

  In this case, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 displaced in the directions close to each other are brought into contact with each other, an impact is generated and the posture may be unstable, such as rebounding from each other. In the present embodiment, a structure that suppresses the impact at the time of contact is employed. Details of this structure will be described later.

  The protruding unit 700 has a horizontally long base member 710 disposed in the lower portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and a lifting member disposed on the base member 710 so as to be movable up and down. A base 720 and a rotary member 730 rotatably disposed on the lift base 720. The lift base 720, together with the rotary member 730, is retracted to the front side of the base member 710 and the rear case 300. It is formed so as to be able to be displaced (lifted / lowered) between an overhanging position protruding to the front side of the opening 301a.

  The projecting unit 700 includes a projecting member 735 that can be moved into and out of the rotating member 730 (sliding displacement), a swinging member 732 that is swingably disposed on the rotating member 730, the projecting member 735, And a drive motor 763 (see FIG. 37) for driving the swing member 732.

  The projecting unit 700 drives the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 by one drive motor 763. Therefore, the driving force necessary for driving the projecting member 735 and the driving force necessary for the swinging member 732 overlap with each other, so that the load increases and the durability of the drive motor 763 may be reduced. In the embodiment, a structure that suppresses the load of the drive motor 763 is employed. This structure will be described later.

  The elevating unit 800 includes a base member 810 that is rectangular in a front view disposed in front of the base member 510 in the upper combined unit 500, and an elevating member 820 that is disposed on the base member 810 so as to be movable up and down. The elevating member 820 is formed to be displaceable (elevated) between a retracted position retracted to the front side of the base member 810 and an overhanging position protruding to the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 18. First, a structure in which the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are slid with respect to the base member 410 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12.

  FIG. 10 is a front view of the slide unit 400. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 400, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 400. 10 to 12 show a state in which the left slide member 430 is disposed at the retracted position (position farthest from the right slide member 450).

  As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the slide unit 400 includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 300 and a sliding bar disposed on the base member 410. Member 420, left slide member 430 and right slide member 450 slidably connected to slide rod member 420, and slide displacement of left slide member 430 and right slide member 450 along slide rod member 420 And a drive mechanism for making it happen.

  The base member 410 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and a sliding rod member 420 is disposed on the front side along the longitudinal direction thereof. A plate-like protruding plate portion 411 protrudes horizontally from the lower portion of the sliding rod member 420 toward the front side of the base member 410, and the upper surface of the protruding plate portion 411 (facing the sliding rod member 420 is faced). The base side rack gear 412 is engraved on the lower side of the projecting plate portion 411, and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are engraved on the lower surface of the protruding plate portion 411.

  The slide bar member 420 is a metal bar having a circular cross section for guiding the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450, and is inserted into the slide holes of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450. Thus, both the slide members 430 and 450 are slidably held. Note that both ends of the sliding rod member 420 are fixed to the base member 410 by a pair of holding members 415.

  The base-side rack gear 412, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are rack gears that extend along the longitudinal direction of the sliding rod member 420 (that is, the sliding direction of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450). The first side pinion gear 432 of the left slide member 430 is engaged with the base side rack gear 412, and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are connected to the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450, respectively. Transmission gears 437a and 457a (see FIGS. 13 to 16) are engaged with each other.

  The left slide member 430 includes a first member 431 that is rectangular in a front view, a first pinion gear 432 that is rotatably disposed on the first member 431, and a second gear that meshes with the first side pinion gear 432. Front-side rectangular second member 433 having side rack gear 433a, front-side rectangular longitudinal base member 434 hanging downward from the distal end side of second member 433, and rotatable to the front side of base member 434 Rotation member 435 disposed on the surface, displacement member 436 disposed on the back side of the rotation member 435, and transmission (sliding displacement) of base member 434 relative to base member 410 to transmission member 435. Gears 437a to 437f are mainly provided.

  The first member 431 includes a sliding hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431 and having a circular inner peripheral surface, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. The sliding rod member 420 can slide (slide displacement) along the axial direction (longitudinal direction). In other words, the first member 431 is slidably disposed on the base member 410 via the sliding rod member 420.

  A first side rack gear 431a is engraved on the upper surface of the first member 431. The first side rack gear 431 a is a rack gear that meshes with a left drive gear 471 described later, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431. Therefore, as will be described later, when the left drive gear 471 is rotationally driven, the rotational motion is converted into a linear motion by the first side rack gear 431a, and the first member 431 is slid along the slide bar member 420. The

  As described above, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotatably disposed (supported) on the first member 431, and the portion where the first side pinion gear 432 is disposed (the front side of the first member 431). Is provided with a cover 431b having a rectangular plate shape in front view. That is, the first side pinion gear 432 is disposed in a state of being covered on the back side of the cover 431b.

  The first side pinion gear 432 is meshed with the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410. Therefore, when the first member 431 is slid along the sliding rod member 420, that is, when the first member 431 is slid with respect to the base member 410, the first member 431 receives an action from the base side rack gear 412 along with the sliding displacement. Thus, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated.

  The second member 433 is disposed (coupled) to the first member 431 so as to be displaceable, and the sliding member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole on the distal end side, so that the second member 433 is relative to the first member 431. While being displaced, sliding (sliding displacement) is possible along the sliding rod member 420. The sliding hole has an inner peripheral surface with a circular cross section and extends along the longitudinal direction of the second member 433.

  In this case, the second member 433 is provided with a second rack gear 433a on the lower surface thereof, and the second rack gear 433a is engaged with the first pinion gear 432. Therefore, as described above, when the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the first member 431, the first side pinion gear 432 receives an action (that is, the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 is performed). The second member 433 is displaced relative to the first member 431 by being converted into a linear motion by the second rack gear 433a and then transmitted to the second member 433).

  That is, the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 431 is engaged with both the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433. The driving force accompanying the linear motion of the first member 431 and the driving force accompanying the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 431 is slid with respect to the base member 410, the second member 433 is slid with respect to the base member 410 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member 431. Can do.

  Note that a left slide member 430 and a right slide member 450 are slidably disposed on the slide rod member 420, and the movable ranges of both the slide members 430 and 450 are set to overlap. Therefore, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can be brought into contact with each other. In this case, in this embodiment, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed so that the first member 431 and the rack member 451 are in contact with each other, and the second member 433 is not in contact with the rack member 451. The

  The right slide member 450 can be rotated to the front side of the base member 454, the rack member 451 having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, the base member 454 having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front and hanging downward from the base end side of the rack member 451. , A displacement member 456 disposed on the back side of the rotation member 455, and a movement (slide displacement) of the base member 454 relative to the base member 410 to transmit the rotation member 455 to the rotation member 455. Transmission gears 457a to 457f.

  The rack member 451 includes a sliding hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451 and having a circular inner peripheral surface on the proximal end side, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. Thus, sliding (sliding displacement) is possible along the axial direction (longitudinal direction) of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the rack member 451 is slidably disposed on the base member 410 via the sliding rod member 420.

  A rack gear 451 a is engraved on the top surface of the rack member 451 along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451. A right drive gear 472 described later is meshed with the rack gear 451a. Therefore, as will be described later, when the right drive gear 472 is rotationally driven, the rotational motion is converted into a linear motion by the rack gear 451a, and the rack member 451 is slid along the sliding rod member 420.

  The drive mechanism includes a left drive gear 471 and a right drive gear 472 that are rotatably supported on the front surface of the base member 410, and a left pinion gear 473 and a right pinion gear 474 respectively engaged with the drive gears 471 and 472. The pinion gears 473 and 474 are mainly provided with a left drive motor 475 and a right drive motor 476 to which a drive shaft is connected.

  The left drive gear 471 and the right drive gear 472 are respectively meshed with the first side rack gear 431a of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the rack gear 451a of the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). Therefore, the left drive gear 471 and the right drive gear 472 are rotationally driven by the left drive motor 475 and the right drive motor 476 via the left pinion gear 473 and the right pinion gear 474, and thereby via the first side rack gear 431a and the rack gear 451a. Thus, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) can be slid independently.

  A cover member 416 is disposed in front of the base member 410, and the drive gears 471 and 472 and the pinion gears 473 and 474 are rotatably held between the opposing surfaces of the base member 410 and the cover member 416. . Further, the drive motors 475 and 476 are fastened and fixed to the front side of the cover member 416. In this case, the cover member 416 is provided with an insertion hole, and the drive shafts of the drive motors 475 and 476 are connected to the pinion gears 473 and 474 through the insertion hole.

  Next, a structure for rotating the rotating members 435 and 455 in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  13 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 430, and FIG. 14 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 430.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the base member 434 includes a back side base member 434 a connected to the second member 433 and a front side disposed (covered) on the front side of the back side base member 434 a. The transmission gears 437a to 437f are rotatably supported (axially supported) between the opposing surfaces (internal space) of the back side base member 434a and the front side base member 434b. The front side base member 434b is provided with a shaft support hole 434b1 having a circular shape when viewed from the front.

  As described above, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are a gear group for transmitting the movement (sliding displacement) of the base member 434 relative to the base member 410 to the rotating member 435, and are connected (intermeshed) in series. Then, one gear train (gear train) is formed with the transmission gear 437a as the head and the transmission gear 437f as the tail.

  As described above, the leading transmission gear 437a is meshed with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435 is coaxially fixed to the rear transmission gear 437f.

  Therefore, by sliding the left slide member 430 (base member 434) relative to the base member 410, the leading transmission gear 437a is rotated by the action of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and the rotation is It is transmitted to the rear transmission gear 437f via the transmission gears 437b to 437e, and the rotation member 435 can be rotated by the rotation of the rear transmission gear 437f.

  The rotation member 435 includes a rotation shaft 435a and a support shaft 435b that are coaxially provided from the back surface. The rotation shaft 435a is a portion that becomes a rotation shaft when the rotation member 435 rotates with respect to the base member 434, and is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b. In this case, the transmission gear 437f is coaxially connected to the rotation shaft 435a so as not to be relatively rotatable. Therefore, as described later, the rotation member 435 is rotated with respect to the base member 434 by rotating the transmission gear 437f.

  The support shaft 435b is a portion that rotatably supports the displacement member 436 on the back side of the rotation member 435, and is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 436a of the displacement member 436. The E-ring is fitted in a fitting groove that is recessed at the tip of the support shaft 435b, so that the displacement member 436 is prevented from coming off from the support shaft 435b.

  The displacement member 436 is a member disposed on the back side of the rotation member 435 so as to be displaceable, and includes a shaft support hole 436a, a relief hole 436b, and a curved rack gear 436c. As described above, the support shaft 435b of the rotation member 435 is inserted into the shaft support hole 436a, and thereby the displacement member 436 is rotatably supported by the rotation member 435.

  The escape hole 436b is formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape by dividing an annular shape centering on the axis of the shaft support hole 436a at a predetermined center angle, and the groove width of the escape hole 436b is the rotation member 435. The dimension is set slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, when the displacement member 436 is displaced with respect to the rotation member 435 (rotates about the shaft support hole 436a), the rotation shaft 435a can be displaced along the escape hole 436b, and the displacement of the rotation member 435 Interference with the member 436 can be avoided.

  The curved rack gear 436c is formed as a rack gear engraved along a circumferential surface centering on the axis of the shaft support hole 436a. Here, a drive motor 441 is disposed on the back surface of the rotating member 435, and a pinion gear 442 is fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 441, and the pinion gear 442 is meshed with the curved rack gear 436c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 442 in the forward direction or the reverse direction by the drive motor 441, the displacement member 436 rotates in one direction or the other direction with respect to the rotation member 435 with the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the rotation center. Can be made.

  In this case, the rotation member 435 is formed in a substantially long shape whose frontal shape is larger in the lengthwise direction than in the widthwise direction, and is located at the approximate center in the lengthwise and widthwise directions. A rotating shaft 435a is disposed on the surface. The front view shape of the displacement member 436 is formed in a shape obtained by dividing the rotating member 435 into substantially two parts at the center in the length direction. Therefore, by rotating the displacement member 436 in one direction around the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b), the displacement member 436 is hidden on the back side of the rotation member 435 so that it is difficult for the player to see. Can do.

  In addition, since the drive motor 441 is disposed on the rotation member 435 on the opposite side of the displacement member 436 with the support shaft 435b interposed therebetween, the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the drive motor 441 are disposed on the rotation member 435 is provided. The position of the center of gravity can be brought close to the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435. Therefore, the rotation of the structure with respect to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

  In the present embodiment, in a state where the displacement member 436 is rotated in one direction around the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) (in a state where the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotation member 435), the rotation member The position of the center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the drive motor 441 are disposed at 435 is substantially coincident with the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435. Therefore, the rotation of the structure relative to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

  On the other hand, in a state in which the displacement member 436 is rotated in the other direction around the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) (a state in which the displacement member 436 is visibly protruded to the side of the rotation member 435), The center-of-gravity position of the structure described above can be separated from the rotation shaft 435a of the rotating member 435 by the amount of protrusion of the displacement member 436. Thereby, the center of gravity position can be adjusted according to the rotation direction of the rotating member 435, and the initial operation can be performed smoothly.

  That is, when the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is started from the stopped state, the driving force is increased due to the influence of the inertial force. In this case, the center of gravity of the structure described above with the displacement member 436 projecting to the side of the rotation member 435 is lowered downward in the gravitational direction at the start of slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, rotation of the rotation member 435). When the displacement member 436 is positioned on the side to be displaced, the displacement member 436 is projected to the side of the rotation member 435 (rotated in one direction), so that the rotation due to the weight of the structure described above causes Rotation can be assisted. Thereby, the burden of the left drive motor 475 (refer FIG. 11) can be eased, and the slide displacement from the stop state of the left slide member 430 can be started smoothly.

  On the other hand, the center of gravity of the structure in the state where the displacement member 436 projects to the side of the rotation member 435 is displaced upward in the gravity direction at the start of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, rotation of the rotation member 435). If the displacement member 436 is located behind the rotating member 435, the displacement member 436 is concealed (rotated in the other direction) so that the center of gravity of the structure described above approaches (coincides with) the rotating shaft 435a. Thus, the load (see FIG. 11) of the left drive motor 475 can be suppressed from increasing. Thereby, the slide displacement from the stop state of the left slide member 430 can be started smoothly.

  Further, the center of gravity of the structure in the state where the displacement member 436 projects to the side of the rotation member 435 is displaced upward in the gravity direction when the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, rotation of the rotation member 435) is stopped. In the case of being located on the side to be rotated, it is possible to easily stop the rotation by the weight of the structure described above. Thereby, when the drive of the left drive motor 475 (refer FIG. 11) is stopped, the left slide member 430 can be stopped quickly.

  15 is an exploded front perspective view of the right slide member 450, and FIG. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right slide member 450. The base member 454 includes a back side base member 454a connected to the rack member 451, and a front side base member 454b disposed (covered) on the front side of the back side base member 454a. Transmission gears 457a to 457f are rotatably held (axially supported) between opposing surfaces (internal space) of member 454a and front-side base member 454b. The front-side base member 454b is provided with a shaft support hole 454b1 that is circular when viewed from the front.

  As described above, the transmission gears 457a to 457f are a gear group for transmitting the movement (sliding displacement) of the base member 454 relative to the base member 410 to the rotating member 455, and are connected (engaged) in series. Then, one gear train (gear train) is formed with the transmission gear 457a as the head and the transmission gear 457f as the tail.

  As described above, the leading transmission gear 457a is meshed with the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of the base member 410, and the rotation shaft 455a of the rotation member 455 is coaxially fixed to the rear transmission gear 457f.

  Therefore, by sliding the right slide member 450 (base member 454) relative to the base member 410, the leading transmission gear 457a is rotated by the action from the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of the base member 410, and the rotation is The transmission is transmitted to the rear transmission gear 457f via the transmission gears 457b to 457e, and the rotation member 455 can be rotated by the rotation of the rear transmission gear 457f.

  The rotation member 455 includes a rotation shaft 455a and a support shaft 455b that are coaxially provided from the back surface. The rotation shaft 455a is a portion that becomes a rotation shaft when the rotation member 455 rotates with respect to the base member 454, and is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 454b1 of the front side base member 454b. In this case, the transmission gear 457f is coaxially connected to the rotation shaft 435a so as not to be relatively rotatable. Therefore, as will be described later, when the transmission gear 457f is rotated, the rotating member 455 is rotated with respect to the base member 454.

  The support shaft 455b is a portion that rotatably supports the displacement member 456 on the back side of the rotation member 455, and is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 456a of the displacement member 456. The E-ring is fitted in a fitting groove that is recessed at the tip of the support shaft 455b, thereby preventing the displacement member 456 from coming off from the support shaft 455b.

  The displacement member 456 is a member disposed on the back side of the rotating member 455 so as to be displaceable, and includes a shaft support hole 456a, a relief hole 456b, and a curved rack gear 456c. As described above, the support shaft 455b of the rotation member 455 is inserted into the shaft support hole 456a, and thereby the displacement member 456 is rotatably supported by the rotation member 455.

  The escape hole 456b is formed as a groove-like opening curved in an arc shape by dividing an annular shape centering on the axis of the shaft support hole 456a at a predetermined center angle, and the groove width of the escape hole 456b is the width of the rotating member 455. The dimension is set slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 455a. Therefore, when the displacement member 456 is displaced (rotated about the shaft support hole 456a) with respect to the rotation member 455, the rotation shaft 455a can be displaced along the escape hole 456b. Interference with the member 456 can be avoided.

  The curved rack gear 456c is formed as a rack gear engraved along a circumferential surface centering on the axis of the shaft support hole 456a. Here, a drive motor 461 is disposed on the back surface of the rotating member 455, and a pinion gear 452 is fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 461, and the pinion gear 452 is engaged with the curved rack gear 456c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 452 in the forward direction or the reverse direction by the drive motor 461, the displacement member 456 is rotated in one direction or the other direction with respect to the rotation member 455 around the shaft support hole 456a (support shaft 455b). Can be made.

  In this case, the rotary member 455 is formed in a substantially long shape whose front view shape is larger in the length direction than in the width direction, and the rotation shaft 455a is provided at one end side in the length direction. A drive motor 461 is disposed on the other end side. Further, since the rotation member 455 is provided with the displacement member 456 on the opposite side of the drive motor 461 across the support shaft 455b, the structure of the structure in which the displacement member 456 and the drive motor 461 are provided on the rotation member 455. The position of the center of gravity can be disposed at a position eccentric to the one end side of the rotating member 455 (a position separated from the rotating shaft 455a).

  Therefore, at the start of slide displacement of the right slide member 450 (that is, rotation of the rotation member 455), the center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 456 and the drive motor 461 are disposed on the rotation member 455 is displaced downward in the gravity direction. By positioning on the side, the weight of the structure can be applied in the direction in which the structure itself is rotated. Thereby, the load of the right drive motor 476 (see FIG. 11) can be reduced, and the slide displacement from the stopped state of the right slide member 450 can be started smoothly.

  On the other hand, when the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 455) is stopped, the gravity center of the structure is set as a resistance by positioning the center of gravity of the structure on the side displaced upward in the gravity direction. By acting, it is possible to easily stop the rotation of the structure value. Thereby, when the drive of the right drive motor 476 (refer FIG. 11) is stopped, the right slide member 450 can be stopped rapidly.

  Further, as will be described later, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is brought into contact (collision) with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), whereby the right slide member 450 is retracted (right side in FIG. 10). The center of gravity of the structure described above is positioned on the side that displaces upward in the direction of gravity, so that the weight of the structure acts as a resistance and exhibits a buffering effect due to the rotation of the structure value. Can be made.

  Next, the operation of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17 and 18 are front views of the slide unit 400, and illustrate a transition state when the left slide member 430 is slid. 17 and 18 show a state where the cover member 416, the guide member 419, the left drive motor 475, and the right drive motor 476 are removed.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, in a state where the left slide member 430 is disposed at the retracted position, the second member 433 is relatively displaced relative to the first member 431 in the extension direction, and the base member 434 is movable. It is arranged at the left end of the range (the left side in FIG. 17A, the position farthest from the right slide member 450). When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the forward direction from this state, the first member 431 moves rightward (see FIG. 11) with respect to the base member 410 by the action of the left drive gear 471 and the first rack gear 431a. 17 (a) is slid to the right and in the direction approaching the right slide member 450).

  In this case, as described above, the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 are disposed facing each other in a parallel posture, and the second side rack gear 433a and the base side Since the first side pinion gear 432 that is pivotally supported by the first member 431 is interposed in a state of being engaged with both of the rack gears 412, when the first member 431 is slid relative to the base member 410, The first side pinion gear 432 is rotated while being slidably displaced together with the first member 431 by the action of the base side rack gear 412, and the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 is applied to the second side rack gear 433 a, whereby the second member 433. Is slid in the same direction as the first member 431. That is, the second member 433 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state in which the second member 433 is accelerated than the first member 431.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 17B, the second member 433 whose slide displacement speed is relatively faster than the first member 431 catches up with the first member 431, and is second with respect to the first member 431. The member 433 is partially overlapped (the total length in the longitudinal direction of the first member 431 and the second member 433 is shortened).

  From this state, the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the forward direction, and the first member 431 is further in the right direction with respect to the base member 410 (the right side in FIG. 18), the second member 433 is displaced relative to the first member 431 at the maximum in the shortening direction as shown in FIG. 18A, and the base member 434 is moved to the right end (FIG. 18). (A) Right side, the position closest to the right slide member 450), that is, the projecting position.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the opposite direction to the above-described case from the state where the left slide member 430 is disposed at the extended position. Due to the action of the left drive gear 471 and the first side rack gear 431a, the first member 431 is slid in the left direction with respect to the base member 410 (the left side in FIG. 18 (a), the direction away from the right slide member 450). .

  Also in this case, as in the case described above, the operation of the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433, the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410, and the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 431. Thus, the second member 433 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state in which the second member 433 is accelerated at a speed higher than that of the first member 431.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 17B, the second member 433 whose slide displacement speed is relatively faster than that of the first member 431 precedes the first member 431, and the first member 431 is compared with the first member 431. The second member 433 is relatively displaced in the extending direction (the total length in the longitudinal direction of the first member 431 and the second member 433 is extended more than the total length in the extended position).

  From this state, the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the reverse direction, and the first member 431 is further leftward with respect to the base member 410 (the left side in FIG. 17B and the direction away from the right slide member 450). 17), as shown in FIG. 17A, the second member 433 is relatively displaced relative to the first member 431 in the extension direction, and the base member 434 is moved to the left end of the movable range (FIG. 17). (A) The leftmost position is the position farthest from the right slide member 450), that is, the projecting position.

  In the present embodiment, a detection portion is formed at the tip of the second member 431 and a detection sensor for detecting the detection is provided on the base member 410 (none of which is shown). In this case, the detection sensor is disposed at a position where the detected part of the second member 431 can be detected when the second member 431 (left slide member 430) is disposed at the retracted position, and is detected by the detection sensor. Is detected, the drive of the left drive motor 475 is stopped assuming that the left slide member 430 is disposed at the retracted position.

  On the other hand, when the drive of the left drive motor 475 at the extended position is stopped, the number of drive steps of the left drive motor 475 after the start of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 from the retracted position to the extended position is cumulatively added. Is done. That is, when the cumulative addition value reaches a predetermined value, the drive of the left drive motor 475 is stopped assuming that the left slide member 430 is disposed at the extended position.

  Here, in this embodiment, the movable range of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (the range from the retracted position to the extended position) has a portion overlapping the movable range of the slide displacement of the right slide member 450. Therefore, the movable range of both can be enlarged and the production effect can be enhanced.

  However, if the movable range is overlapped as described above, it is caused by variation in the amount of displacement due to rattling (gap) based on variation and tolerance of part dimensions / assembly, or poor control (for example, Due to the occurrence of an error in the cumulative addition of the number of drive steps), the left slide member 430 slid to the extended position may come into contact with the right slide member 450 and may be damaged. On the other hand, if the speed of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is reduced in order to suppress breakage, the presentation effect accompanying the slide displacement is impaired.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed so as to be able to suppress damage while securing the rendering effect accompanying the slide displacement of the left slide member 430.

  That is, as described above, the second member 433 has the second side rack gear 433a and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410, and the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 431. 433 can be slid and displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member 431, and the base member 434 (the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 435 and Since the displacement member 436) is connected, the speed of the slide displacement of the base member 434 can be increased, and the presentation effect accompanying the slide displacement can be ensured.

  On the other hand, as described above, the left slide member 430 makes the first member 431 whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than the second member 433 contact the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). The impact at the time of the contact can be weakened, and the damage of both can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the right slide member 450 is placed on standby (stopped) closer to the retracted position than the extended position of the left slide member 430, and the left slide member 430 is displaced toward the extended position. In this case, the left slide member 430 is brought into contact with the right slide member 450, and the right slide member 450 is pushed in the direction of the slide displacement by the left slide member 430, thereby performing an effect of sliding the two in an integrated state. be able to. Also in this case, the first member 431 whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than the second member 433 can be brought into contact with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). It is possible to suppress the breakage of both of them.

  The right slide member 450 is disposed on the base member 410 so as to be slidable. The slide displacement direction of the right slide member 450 is parallel to the slide displacement direction of the left slide member 430. That is, in the state where the right slide member 450 is disposed at a position where it can come into contact with the left slide member 430 disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 18A), the right slide member 450 is separated from the left slide member 430 (see FIG. 18A). 18 (a) has a movable range for sliding displacement to the right side, and the direction in which the right slide member 450 can slide is changed when the left slide member 430 comes into contact with the left slide member 430. The direction in which the slide displacement is allowed.

  Therefore, when the left slide member 430 comes into contact with the right slide member 450 (see FIG. 18A), the right slide member 450 is retracted (retracted backward) while receiving the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. Thus, a buffering action can be exerted (see FIG. 18B). As a result, damage to the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can be easily suppressed.

  In particular, in this embodiment, since the slide displacement directions of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are parallel, when the left slide member 430 comes into contact with the right slide member 450, the right slide member 450. The escape operation can be performed smoothly. Therefore, it is possible to reliably exhibit a buffering action and to suppress the damage of both.

  Further, in this case, since the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 share the slide bar member 420, both slide displacement directions are made parallel, so that the overall size can be reduced. . That is, when the slide bar member for guiding the left slide member 430 and the slide bar member for guiding the right slide member 450 are arranged side by side in different directions perpendicular to the slide displacement direction. Therefore, the space is increased and the size is increased. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since both slide members 430 and 450 serve as one slide bar member 420, space efficiency can be improved and downsizing can be achieved.

  As described above, the right slide member 450 has a movable range in a direction away from the left slide member 430 disposed at the extended position (right side in FIG. 18A), and is not in contact with the left slide member 430. It can be arranged at a position where it comes into contact. That is, a state in which the left slide member 430 is not brought into contact with the right slide member 450 can be formed.

  Therefore, when the left slide member 430 is slid at a relatively high speed, it is likely that the stop position of the left slide member 430 extends beyond the target position due to the above-described variation and control failure. When the right slide member 450 is positively brought into contact with the slide member 430 (functioning as a stopper), when the left slide member 430 is slid at a relatively low speed, the stop position can be easily matched with the target position. Therefore, by disposing the right slide member 450 at a position where it does not contact the left slide member 430, it is possible to reduce the number of contact and reduce fatigue associated with contact. As a result, the lifetime of both slide members 430 and 450 can be improved.

  Here, in order to increase the speed of the second member 433 relative to the first member 431, the left slide member 430 is provided with these members 431 and 433 separately, and the base side rack gear 412 and the second side rack gear. It is necessary to interpose the first side pinion gear 432 between 433a, and the number of parts and sliding parts increase, so that the weight and driving resistance increase. Therefore, the force required for driving the left slide member 430 is relatively large.

  In particular, during the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (when the slide displacement is started from the stop state), the force required for driving is maximized due to the influence of inertial force. Therefore, since the initial operation (initial speed when the slide displacement is started from the stop state) is slowed down, there is a possibility that the presentation effect accompanying the slide displacement is hindered.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the right slide member 450 is formed so as to be able to contact the left slide member 430, and the left slide member 430 is pushed back to the retracted position from the contacted state (FIG. 18A). ) It is formed to be slidable in the left direction). Therefore, the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (the operation of starting the slide displacement from the stopped state) can be assisted by the slide displacement of the right slide member 450. Thereby, the left slide member 430 can be quickly slid from the stopped state. As a result, the initial operation (initial speed) can be increased, and the effect of the presentation accompanying the slide displacement can be improved.

  Further, the right slide member 450 contacts the first member 431 of the left slide member 430 when the left slide member 430 is slid in the direction of pushing the left slide member 430 back to the retracted position (left direction in FIG. 18A). Therefore, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be increased.

  That is, the right slide member 450 is brought into contact with the first member 431 whose slide displacement speed is slower than the second member 433 of the left slide member 430 and pushes back the first member 431. The time when the auxiliary force is acting on the left slide member 430 (first member 431) from the beginning (that is, after the stopped left slide member 430 starts to be pushed back, the speed of the left slide member 430 exceeds the speed of the right slide member 450) Thus, the time until the displacement of the left slide member 430 precedes the displacement of the right slide member 450 can be made longer, and as a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be increased.

  Here, a mechanism (left pinion gear 473, left drive gear 471, and first side rack gear 431a) that converts the rotational drive force of the left drive motor 475 into a linear motion and slides the left slide member 430 (first member 431). Gear ratio and the gear of the mechanism (right pinion gear 474, right drive gear 472, and rack gear 451a) that converts the rotational drive force of the right drive motor 476 into linear motion and slides the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). The ratio is set to a different gear ratio, and in this embodiment, the gear ratio in the former (left slide member 430) is set to a gear ratio larger than the gear ratio in the latter (right slide member 450).

  In the present embodiment, the left pinion gear 473 is formed in the same shape as the right pinion gear 474, and the first side rack gear 431a is formed in the same shape as the rack gear 451a, so the number of teeth of the left drive gear 471 is the number of teeth of the right drive gear 472. The number of teeth is set larger than the number. That is, a large gear ratio means that the rack gear (first-side rack gear 431a or rack gear 451a) is displaced in the sliding displacement direction when the drive shaft of the drive motor (left drive motor 475 or right drive motor 476) makes one rotation. Means large amount.

  As a result, the left slide member 430 can be easily slid and displaced quickly from the stopped state, and after the start of the slide displacement, the slide displacement speed of the left slide member 450 (second member 433) can be increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the production effect associated with the slide displacement.

  That is, since the gear ratio in the right slide member 450 is set to a relatively small gear ratio, a larger driving force can be exerted. Therefore, the force by which the right slide member 450 pushes back the left slide member 430 is increased. Thus, it is possible to reliably assist the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (start of slide displacement from the stopped state). Therefore, the left slide member 430 can be quickly linearly displaced from the stopped state.

  On the other hand, since the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is set to a relatively large gear ratio, the speed of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) can be increased. The slide displacement speed of the second member 433 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect accompanying the slide displacement.

  If the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is reduced in order to smoothly perform the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (start of slide displacement from the stopped state), the initial operation becomes smooth, but the initial operation ends. In the subsequent steady state, the slide displacement speed (maximum speed) of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) decreases. On the other hand, if the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is increased to increase the slide displacement speed (maximum speed) of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) in the steady state after the initial operation, the maximum speed can be increased. The initial operation (start of slide displacement from the stopped state) is hindered (slower). That is, both the smooth operation of the initial operation of the left slide member 430 and the increase of the slide displacement speed (maximum speed) of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) in the steady state after the initial operation are achieved. However, it was impossible in the past, and this is the first time that the right slide member 450 has adopted a structure in which the left slide member 430 is pushed back.

  Next, detailed configurations of the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower uniting unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. First, the upper unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 19A is a front view of the upper uniting unit 500, and FIG. 19B is a rear view of the upper uniting unit 500. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper united unit 500, and FIG. 21 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper united unit 500. FIG. 19 illustrates a state where the upper displacement member 530 is disposed at the retracted position.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 to 21, the upper combined unit 500 is connected to a base member 510, a rack member 520 slidably disposed in the internal space of the base member 510, and the rack member 520. An upper displacement member 530 and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacing the rack member 520 are provided.

  The base member 510 includes a rear base 511 that is rectangular horizontally long when viewed from the front, and a front base 512 that is rectangular long when viewed from the front and is disposed (covered) on the front side of the back base 511. The rack member 520 is accommodated between the facing surfaces of 512 (internal space) so as to be slidable.

  The back surface base 511 includes a connecting hole 511a formed as a groove-shaped opening extending linearly, a guide hole 511b formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape, and a rack member protruding to the front side. And a support shaft 511c inserted through the guide groove 522 of 520.

  The connection hole 511a is an opening for connecting the rack member 520 and the upper displacement member 530, and is formed along (in parallel with) the longitudinal direction of the back surface base 511 (that is, the sliding direction of the rack member 520). The connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530 is slidably inserted into the connecting hole 511a.

  The guide hole 511b is a portion through which the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 is slidably inserted. When the upper displacement member 530 is displaced in accordance with the slide displacement of the rack member 520, the guide hole 511b As the guide pin 532 is slid along the guide hole 511b, the posture (orientation) of the upper displacement member 530 is changed.

  The rack member 520 is formed as a shaft support hole 521 that is a circular hole in front view for rotatably supporting the connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530, and a groove-shaped opening that extends linearly. A guide groove 522 and a rack gear 523 engraved along a direction parallel to the direction in which the guide groove 522 extends are formed as a rectangular horizontally long plate-like body.

  A support shaft 511c of the back base 511 is slidably inserted into the guide groove 522. When the support shaft 511c of the back base 511 is inserted into the guide groove 522 and the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 521, the extending direction of the guide groove 522 is changed to that of the back base 511. It is parallel to the extending direction of the connecting hole 511a. Therefore, the slide displacement direction of the rack member 520 is defined as the extending direction of the connection hole 511a of the back surface base 511.

  The upper displacement member 530 includes a connecting shaft 531 and a guide pin 532 that project from the front side. The connection shaft 531 is a cylindrical body having a circular cross section that is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 521 of the rack member 520 via the connection hole 511 a of the back surface base 511, and the guide pin 532 is provided on the back surface base 511. It is a cylindrical body having a circular cross section that is slid along the guide hole 511b.

  A collar C1 having a larger diameter than the shaft support hole 521 and a collar C2 having a larger diameter than the groove width of the guide hole 511b are fixed to the distal ends of the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532, respectively, and are prevented from coming off. . Further, the upper displacement member 530 has an upper contact portion 533 formed on the side surface thereof. The upper abutting portion 533 is a portion that abuts on the lower abutting portion 643 (see FIGS. 25 and 26) of the lower displacement member 640, and is on the side surface opposite to the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 (front end side). It is formed.

  The drive mechanism includes a drive gear 541 rotatably supported on the front surface of the rear base 511, a pinion gear 542 meshed with the drive gear 541, a drive motor 543 with a drive shaft connected to the pinion gear 542, Prepare. The drive gear 541 is meshed with the rack gear 523 of the rack member 520. Therefore, by rotating the drive gear 541 via the pinion gear 542 by the drive motor 543, the rack member 520 can be slid along the extending direction of the coupling hole 511a via the rack gear 523.

  Next, the operation of the upper unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23 are a front view and a rear view of the upper united unit 500, and a transition state when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced between the retracted position and the extended position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 22A and 23A, in a state where the upper displacement member 530 is disposed at the retracted position, the connection shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 are connected to one end side of the connection hole 511a and the guide hole 511b (see FIG. 23, the upper displacement member 530 is arranged in a horizontal posture and hidden on the back side of the base member 510.

  When the drive motor 543 is driven in the forward direction from such a state, the connecting shaft 531 is displaced in the horizontal direction along the connecting hole 511a as the rack member 520 slides, and the guide pin 532 is guided in the guide hole 511b. 22 (b) and FIG. 23 (b), the upper displacement member 530 is inclined obliquely (while being rotated about the connecting shaft 531), as shown in FIGS. Is displaced. That is, the tip side (upper contact portion 533) of the upper displacement member 530 is lowered while drawing a curved locus.

  When the drive motor 543 is further driven in the forward direction, the upper displacement member 530 is displaced in the horizontal direction while being further inclined obliquely (rotating about the connecting shaft 531), and FIG. 22 (c) and FIG. As shown in FIG. 23C, a vertical posture is formed with the tip side (upper contact portion 533) directed downward. That is, it is arranged at the overhang position (first position).

  Next, the lower unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 24 is a front view of the lower uniting unit 600. FIG. 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower united unit 600, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower united unit 600. FIG. 23 illustrates a state where the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at the retracted position.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, the lower unit 600 includes a base member 610, a drive arm holding member 620 disposed below the front side of the base member 610, and a base end of the drive arm holding member 620. A drive arm 630 whose side is rotatably held, a lower displacement member 640 to which the distal end side of the drive arm 630 is connected, a connection arm 650 for connecting the lower displacement member 640 to the base member 610, and a drive arm 630 are attached. An urging spring 660 for applying a force and a drive mechanism for applying a drive force to the drive arm 630 are provided.

  The base member 610 is formed as a substantially L-shaped plate-like body when viewed from the front, and has a protruding base 611 protruding from the front at the lower end of the substantially L shape and a front protruding from the front at the upper end of the substantially L shape. The connecting shaft 612 is provided. The projecting base 611 is a part for disposing the drive arm holding member 620 at a position where the drive arm holding member 620 protrudes from the front of the base member 610 (raised to the front side), and extends along the edge at the lower end of the base member 610. Projected.

  The drive arm holding member 620 includes a back side holding member 621 provided on the protruding base 611 of the base member 610 and a front side holding member 622 provided (covered) on the front side of the back side holding member 621. The drive arm 630 and the transmission gears 671a to 671c are rotatably held (axially supported) between the opposing surfaces (internal space) of the back side holding member 621 and the front side holding member 622.

  The drive arm holding member 620 has a back side of the back side holding member 621 disposed at the protruding tip of the protruding base 611 of the base member 610. A predetermined space can be formed between the back surface of the drive arm holding member 620 (back surface side holding member 621) and the front surface of the base member 610. In the present embodiment, the lower displacement member 640 disposed at the retracted position is formed in such a space so as to be accommodated, so that the outer shape of the lower unit 600 can be reduced accordingly.

  The drive arm 630 has a shaft support hole 631 rotatably supported by the drive arm holding member 620 and a plurality of teeth engraved along the outer peripheral surface of a cylindrical portion concentric with the shaft support hole 631. As a long member having a gear portion 632 and a connecting hole 633 formed at the end opposite to the gear portion 632, the shaft support hole 631 and the connecting hole 633 are separated by a predetermined distance. It is formed.

  The lower displacement member 640 includes a drive arm connecting shaft 641 and a connecting arm connecting shaft 642 that project from the front side. The drive arm connection shaft 641 is a cylindrical body having a circular cross section that is rotatably connected to the connection hole 633 of the drive arm 630, and the connection arm connection shaft 642 is rotatably connected to the connection hole 651 of the connection arm 650. A cylindrical body having a circular cross section. The lower displacement member 640 is interposed between the drive arm 630 and the connection arm 650, and is displaced with respect to the base member 610 when the drive arm 630 is rotated.

  The lower displacement member 640 has a lower contact portion 643 formed on the side surface thereof. The lower abutting portion 643 is a portion that abuts on the upper abutting portion 533 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the upper displacement member 530, and is based on an imaginary line that connects the drive arm connecting shaft 641 and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642. It is formed on the side surface on the side away from the protruding direction side (right side in FIG. 24). In the present embodiment, the lower contact portion 643 is formed as a surface in a direction substantially orthogonal to a virtual line connecting the drive arm connecting shaft 641 and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642.

  The connection arm 650 includes connection holes 651 and 652 formed on one end side and the other end side. The connection holes 651 and 652 include the connection arm connection shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 and the connection shaft 612 of the base member 610. Are rotatably coupled to each other. Therefore, when the drive arm 630 is rotated and the lower displacement member 640 is displaced with respect to the base member 610, the displacement trajectory in the connection arm connection shaft 642 portion of the lower displacement member 640 is represented by the connection shaft 612 of the base member 610. It can be defined in a circular arc shape as a center.

  The biasing spring 660 is a metal torsion spring. One of the leg portions extending from the winding portion is engaged with the drive arm holding member 620 and the other leg portion is engaged with the drive arm 630, so that the drive arm 630 is engaged. Is urged in the rotational direction from the retracted position to the extended position. That is, when the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 27A), the elastic deformation (torsional deformation) of the urging spring 660 is maximized, and the elastic recovery force causes the drive arm 630 to displace the displacement member. The 640 is biased in the rotation direction (right rotation in FIG. 27A) that displaces it from the retracted position to the extended position. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor 672 is assisted, and the initial operation of the lower displacement member 640 in the projecting direction can be performed smoothly.

  The drive mechanism includes transmission gears 671a to 671c disposed inside the drive arm holding member 620, a drive shaft connected to the transmission gear 671a, and a drive arm holding member 620 (front side holding member 622) disposed in front of the drive arm holding member 620. And a drive motor 672 provided. The transmission gears 671a to 671c are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 672 to the driving arm 630. By connecting (meshing) in series, the transmission gear 671a is the head and the transmission gear 671c is the tail. 1 gear train (gear train) is formed.

  The rear transmission gear 671 c is meshed with the gear portion 632 of the drive arm 630. When the drive motor 672 is rotationally driven, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 671a to the trailing transmission gear 671c, and the trailing transmission gear 671c is rotated. Thus, the rotation of the transmission gear 671c is applied to the gear portion 632, whereby the drive arm 630 is rotated.

  Next, the operation of the lower unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a front view of the lower unit 600, and shows a transition state when the lower displacement member 640 is displaced between the retracted position and the extended position.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, in the state where the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at the retracted position, the drive arm 630 is rotated to the maximum in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (FIG. 27A, the left rotation direction). It is located at a rotational position (hereinafter referred to as “retraction rotational position”), and is in a tilted posture in which it descends downward from the base end side (rotation center, ie, shaft support hole 631) toward the distal end side (connection hole 633). The connecting arm 650 is in a vertical posture in which the direction connecting the connecting holes 651 and 652 is substantially parallel to the vertical direction. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at a position where the horizontal position is the leftmost position (the position farthest from the overhang position in the horizontal direction, the left side in FIG. 27A), and the vertical position is the lowermost position. It is arranged at a position that is (the position farthest from the overhang position in the vertical direction, the lower side in FIG. 27A).

  When the drive motor 672 is driven in the forward direction from this state, as the drive arm 630 rotates clockwise as viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. 27B, the vicinity of the drive arm coupling shaft 641 of the lower displacement member 640 Is displaced upward (upper side in FIG. 27 (b)), and the vicinity of the coupling arm coupling shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 is displaced rightward (right side in FIG. 27 (a)).

  When the drive motor 672 is further driven in the forward direction from the state shown in FIG. 27B, the vicinity of the drive arm connecting shaft 641 of the lower displacement member 640 further increases as the drive arm 630 rotates clockwise. While being displaced upward, the vicinity of the coupling arm coupling shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 is further displaced rightward. As a result, as shown in FIG. 27C, the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at the protruding position.

  In the overhang position, the drive arm 630 is located at a rotation position (hereinafter referred to as “the overhang rotation position”) that is rotated to the maximum in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (FIG. 27 (c) clockwise direction). In the rotational position, the drive arm 630 is disposed at a position where the distal end side (connection hole 633) exceeds a vertical line passing through the proximal end side (rotation center, ie, the shaft support hole 631). Further, the connecting arm 650 is in a tilted posture in which the connecting hole 651 is lifted up most. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at a position where the horizontal position is the rightmost position (the position farthest from the retracted position in the horizontal direction, the right side in FIG. 27C), and the vertical position is the uppermost position ( It is arranged at a position farthest from the retracted position in the up-down direction, a position slightly lowered downward from the upper side of FIG.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29, the displacement speed of the lower unit 600 will be described. FIG. 28 is a schematic front view of the drive arm 630 at the retraction rotation position, the horizontal rotation position, the vertical rotation position, and the overhang rotation position. FIGS. 29A to 29D are schematic partial enlarged front views of the drive arm 630 when the drive arm 630 is rotated from the retracted rotation position to the overhang rotation position.

  Here, as described above, the drive arm 630 is rotated between the retracted rotation position and the overhanging rotation position. In the following, the drive arm 630 is rotated by an angle θ1 from the retracted rotation position, so that the drive arm 630 is in a horizontal posture. The rotation position at which the imaginary line connecting the shaft centers of the shaft support hole 631 and the connection hole 633 is parallel to the horizontal direction is referred to as a “horizontal rotation position” and rotated by an angle θ2 from the horizontal rotation position. The rotation position at which the drive arm 630 is in the standing posture (the posture in which the imaginary line connecting the shaft centers of the shaft support hole 631 and the connection hole 633 is parallel to the vertical direction) is referred to as a “vertical rotation position”. The overhang rotation position is a position rotated by an angle θ3 from the vertical rotation position.

  In this case, FIG. 29A corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of the angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, and FIG. 29B shows the drive arm 630 in the horizontal rotation position. FIG. 29C corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of angle θ2) between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position, and FIG. 29D shows the drive arm in the vertical rotation position. FIG. 29E corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of the angle θ3) between the vertical rotation position and the retracted rotation position.

  Note that the drive state (supplied power) of the drive motor 672 is kept constant, and thus the rotational speed of the drive arm 630 is kept constant. In this case, it is assumed that the transient period from when the drive arm 630 reaches a constant rotational speed through rotation from the stop state is sufficiently small and that there is no transient response.

  As shown in FIGS. 28, 29 (a), and 29 (b), the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connection hole 633 in a section between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position (range of angle θ1). The connecting hole 633 is displaced upward as it is tilted to be positioned below the hole 631 and rotated from the retracted position toward the horizontal rotation position, so the speed V of the connecting hole 633 (the arc shape of the connecting hole 633). The speed component in the tangential direction in the displacement trajectory of (1) is gradually increased in the upward speed component (speed Vv), and is maximized at the horizontal rotation position. That is, in such a section (range of the angle θ1), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward and the upward speed is gradually increased.

  As shown in FIGS. 28, 29 (b) to 29 (d), in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2), the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connection hole 633. The tilting position is set above the hole 631, and the connecting hole 633 is displaced further upward as it is rotated from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position. Therefore, the speed V of the connection hole 633 is upward. The speed component (speed Vv) is gradually reduced to zero at the vertical rotation position. That is, in such a section (range of angle θ2), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward, and the upward speed is gradually reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 29 (d) and FIG. 29 (e), the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connection hole 633 in the section between the vertical rotation position and the overhang rotation position (range of angle θ3). The connecting hole 633 is displaced downward as the driving arm 630 is rotated from the horizontal rotation position toward the vertical rotation position, so that the velocity V of the connection hole 633 is It has a downward velocity component (velocity Vv). That is, in such a section (range of angle θ1), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced downward.

  Thus, the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced in the vicinity of the retracted position. As will be described later, the lower displacement member 640 abuts (combines) the upper displacement member 530 at the retracted position. When it is done, the occurrence of the impact can be suppressed. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 can be prevented from rebounding from the upper displacement member 530, and the postures of both the displacement members 530 and 640 can be stabilized.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 29 (a) to FIG. 29 (d), in the section (range of angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, the speed V of the connecting hole 633 is While the speed component Vh toward the left is gradually increased, in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2), the speed V of the coupling hole 633 is the speed component Vh toward the right. Increased gradually.

  As a result, the lower displacement member 640 is displaced in the vicinity of the connection hole 633 toward the left in the section between the retraction rotation position and the horizontal rotation position (range of the angle θ1), while the displacement direction is horizontal. It is reversed at the rotational position, and is displaced toward the right (in the direction toward the retracted position) in the section (range of angle θ2) between the horizontal rotational position and the vertical rotational position.

  That is, the lower displacement member 640 is horizontally displaced toward the left and stopped at the leftmost end (after the velocity component Vh in the horizontal direction is set to 0), and then the direction of the horizontal displacement is reversed to the right. It can be displaced horizontally in the accelerated state gradually. As a result, the operation of bending and extending the lower displacement member 640 in the horizontal direction can be revealed, and an effect can be provided in which a dynamic feeling is imparted to the operation of the lower displacement member 640.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, in the section in which the horizontal speed component Vh is decreased (range of the angle θ1), the vertical speed component Vv is increased while the horizontal speed component Vh is increased (angle). In the range of θ2), the velocity component Vv in the vertical direction is reduced, so that the above-described operation of bending and stretching in the horizontal direction can be emphasized, and as a result, the player feels that the dynamism of the lower displacement member 640 is stronger. You can make an impression.

  On the other hand, as described above, in order to suppress an impact when the lower displacement member 640 comes into contact with (combines with) the upper displacement member 530, a section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2). ), In the configuration in which the velocity component Vv toward the upper side of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced to 0, there is a possibility that the effect produced by the displacement of the lower displacement member 640 may be hindered. On the other hand, in such a section (range of the angle θ2), the horizontal velocity component Vh can be increased, so that the lower displacement member is replaced by the displacement in the horizontal direction (rightward) instead of the upward displacement. 640 effects can be performed, and as a result, an effect can be ensured.

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, the lower displacement member 640 includes the connecting arm 650 at a portion (the connecting arm connecting shaft 642) that is spaced upward from the portion to which the driving arm 630 is connected (the driving arm connecting shaft 641). Since they are connected, the upper part of the lower displacement member 640 (in the vicinity of the connecting arm connecting shaft 642) can be horizontally displaced toward the right along with the rotation about the connecting hole 652 of the connecting arm 650. . Therefore, as described above, when the operation of bending the lower displacement member 640 in the horizontal direction is revealed, the operation of bending and stretching is increased by the amount of horizontal displacement to the right accompanying the rotation of the connecting arm 650, The feeling of dynamism of the lower displacement member 640 can be further increased. In addition, when performing the effect of the lower displacement member 640 by the displacement in the horizontal direction (rightward) instead of the upward displacement, the displacement in the horizontal direction (rightward) is increased to produce the effect. Can be secured easily.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the contact (union) operation at the extended position of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the upper union unit 500 and the lower union unit 600 will be described.

  FIG. 30 is a front view of the upper unit 500 and the lower unit 600, and shows a transition state when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced between the retracted position and the extended position. .

  As shown in FIG. 30A to FIG. 30C, the upper displacement member 530 moves from the retracted position hidden on the back side of the base member 510 to the front end side as the drive motor 543 is driven. The (upper abutment portion 533) is lowered while drawing a curved trajectory, and is arranged at the overhanging position in a state where a vertical posture is formed with its tip side (upper abutment portion 533) directed downward. On the other hand, the lower displacement member 640 is pushed up by the drive arm 630 from the retracted position where the horizontal position is the leftmost and the vertical position is the lowermost position as the drive motor 672 is driven. Arranged at the exit position.

  As a result, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 disposed at the overhang position are combined with the upper contact portion 533 and the lower contact portion 643 in contact with each other. Thereby, both can be integrated and a predetermined character can be formed. In this embodiment, the upper displacement member 530 is formed in the shape of a horse's head, the lower displacement member 640 is formed in the shape of a horse's torso, and the connecting arm 650 is formed in the shape of a horse's leg. Thus, a jumping horse character is formed at the retreat position.

  Here, when the upper displacement member 530 descending and the lower displacement member 640 ascending come into contact with each other at the retracted position, they are rebounded in a direction away from each other by the impact generated during the contact. Posture (ie character shape) becomes unstable. On the other hand, if the displacement speeds of the upper displacement member 530 and the displacement member 640 are reduced in order to weaken the impact at the time of contact, the time required to form a single character by integrating these displacement members 530 and 640. Is bulky and extends, which impairs the effect of the production.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the lower displacement member 640 is displaced to the extended position, the speed toward the upper side (that is, the upper displacement member 530) of the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640. Since the component Vv is decreased when approaching the overhang position, the occurrence of an impact when the lower displacement member 640 is brought into contact with the upper displacement member 530 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 640 and the upper displacement member 530 from being bounced away from each other, and the postures of both the displacement members 530 and 640 can be stabilized.

  Further, the decrease in the velocity component Vv directed upward of the lower displacement member 640 is gradually performed in the section from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2), and therefore the lower displacement member 640 as a whole. The velocity component Vv heading upward can be ensured. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are integrated to form a single character, and to suppress the extension. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the tip of the drive arm 630 (connection hole 633) is connected to the lower displacement member 640 and the lower displacement member 640 is lifted by the rotation of the drive arm 630, the connection portion (connection hole 633). ) Is drawn so as to gradually reduce the upward speed component Vv, so that the downward movement of the speed component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced, and the drive state of the drive motor 672 is kept constant. As can be done. That is, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the drive state of the drive motor 672 according to the position of the lower displacement member 640. Therefore, the control of the drive motor 672 can be simplified to reduce the control cost and improve the reliability.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the extended rotation position of the drive arm 630 (that is, the extended position where the lower displacement member 640 contacts the upper displacement member 530) is set to a position further rotated from the vertical rotation position. (See FIG. 28). Therefore, the velocity component Vv directed upward (that is, the upper displacement member 530) among the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640 can be a negative value at the overhang position. That is, in the section between the vertical rotation position and the overhang rotation position (range of the angle θ3), the vertical velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is in the direction toward the lower side (the direction away from the upper displacement member 530). Can be an ingredient.

  As a result, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are brought into contact with each other at the retracted position, the lower displacement member 640 can be released downward (retracted) from the upper displacement member 530, so that an impact is generated. Can be suppressed more reliably. Therefore, it can suppress that both the displacement members 530 and 640 bounce in the direction spaced apart from each other, and those postures can be stabilized.

  Further, in this way, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the overhanging position in a state where the velocity component Vv toward the upper side (that is, the upper displacement member 530) among the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640 becomes a negative value. By adopting the configuration, even if a positional deviation occurs at the abutting (merging) position due to dimensional tolerance, assembly tolerance or control variation in the driving mechanism of the lower displacement member 640 or the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640 or the upper displacement member 530 Since the range in which the velocity component Vv toward the upper side of the displacement member 640 is reduced can be widened, it is possible to facilitate contact with the upper displacement member 530 within a range where impact can be suppressed.

  Next, the protruding unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 42. FIG. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the protruding unit 700, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the protruding unit 700. FIG. 33 is a front view of the base member 710 and the lifting base 720, and shows a transition state when the lifting base 720 is lifted and lowered with respect to the base member 710.

  The protruding unit 700 is based on a base member 710, a lifting base 720 disposed on the base member 710 so as to be lifted and lowered, a rotating member 730 rotatably disposed on the lifting base 720, and the base member 710. A driving mechanism for raising and lowering the lifting base 720 and a driving mechanism for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the lifting base 720 are mainly provided.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33, a structure for raising and lowering the elevating base 720 relative to the base member 710 will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the base member 710 is provided with an insertion hole 711 that is opened as a circular hole in front view substantially at the center in the width direction, a support shaft 712 that projects from the front, and a projecting from the back. Two support shafts 713 and 714. The rotation shaft 771a of the drive arm 771 is rotatably inserted into the insertion hole 711. Further, a shaft support hole 719a of the connecting arm 719 is rotatably supported on the front support shaft 712, and transmission gears 772b and 772c are rotatably supported on the back support shafts 713 and 714, respectively. .

  The elevating base 720 includes a rear base 721, a front base 722 positioned in front of the rear base 721, and an intermediate base 723 interposed between the rear base 721 and the lower end side of the front base (FIG. 34 and FIG. 35). The back base 721 and the front base 722 are opposed to the elevating base 720 with a predetermined distance corresponding to the thickness of the intermediate base 723, and a rotating member 730 is provided between the opposing surfaces of the back base 721 and the front base 722. Is rotatably accommodated (arranged).

  One side in the width direction of the back surface base 721 is connected to the base member 710 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is an extendable linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical posture with its extension / contraction direction along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL is a base end rail disposed on the front surface of the base member 710, a front end rail disposed on the back surface of the elevating base 720 (rear base 721), and a base rail between the base end rail and the front end rail. And an intermediate rail that can displace the proximal rail and the distal rail relative to each other in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, the elevating base 720 can be raised and lowered along the vertical direction with respect to the base member 710 by extending and retracting the slide rail SL.

  The back surface base 721 of the elevating base 720 includes a sliding groove 721a extending linearly along the width direction, and a shaft support hole 721b for rotatably supporting the rotation shaft 731a of the rotating member 730. An opening is formed. A sliding pin 719b of the connecting arm 719 is slidably inserted into the sliding groove 721a via the collar C. As will be described later, the connecting arm 719 is driven by the drive arm 771, and the sliding pin 719b of the connecting arm 719 is slid along the sliding groove 721a, so that the lifting base 720 (rear base 721) is lifted and lowered. The

  The connecting arm 719 is projected from the front at the end of the base member 710 that is rotatably supported by the support shaft 712 of the base member 710, and the end opposite to the shaft support hole 719a, and the elevating base 720 (rear base 721). ) And a driven groove 719c extending linearly along the direction connecting the shaft support hole 719a and the sliding pin 719b. . A driving pin 771b of the driving arm 771 is slidably inserted through the collar C into the driven groove 719c. As will be described later, when the drive arm 771 is driven to rotate, the connecting arm 719 is rotated about the shaft support hole 719a as a rotation center.

  A drive mechanism for raising and lowering the elevating base 720 relative to the base member 710 includes a drive arm 771 that rotatably supports the rotary shaft 771a in the insertion hole 711 of the base member 710, and a rotary shaft 771a of the drive arm 771. The transmission gear 772a to 772d to which the rear transmission gear 772d is connected, and the drive shaft is connected to the leading transmission gear 772a of the transmission gears 772a to 772d and the drive disposed in front of the base member 710 And a motor 773.

  The transmission gears 772a to 772d are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 773 to the driving arm 771, and are connected in series (engaged) so that the transmission gear 772a is the leading transmission gear 772d. 1 gear train (gear train) is formed.

  Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 773 is rotationally driven in the forward direction from the state where the elevating base 720 is disposed at the lowest position (retracted position) (see FIG. 21A), the rotational driving force is transmitted to the head. The transmission is transmitted from the gear 772a to the rear transmission gear 772d, and the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in one direction. As a result, the drive arm 771 connected to the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in the forward direction (FIG. 33 (a) clockwise) about the rotation shaft 771a. As a result, the connecting arm 719 is rotated in the upright direction (FIG. 33 (a) clockwise) with the shaft support hole 719a as the rotation center, and the elevating base 720 is raised to the uppermost position (extension position) (FIG. 21 (c). )reference).

  On the other hand, when the drive motor 773 is driven to rotate in the reverse direction from the state where the elevating base 720 is disposed at the uppermost position (the extended position) (see FIG. 21C), the rotational driving force is transmitted to the leading transmission gear. 772a is transmitted to the rear transmission gear 772d, and the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in the other direction. As a result, the drive arm 771 connected to the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 33 (c)) about the rotation shaft 771a. As a result, the connecting arm 719 is rotated in the tilting direction (FIG. 33 (c) counterclockwise) with the shaft support hole 719a as the center of rotation, and the elevating base 720 is lowered to the lowest position (retracted position) (FIG. 21 (a)). )reference).

  Next, a structure for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the lifting base 720 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36.

  FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting base 720 and the rotating member 730, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting base 720 and the rotating member 730. FIG. 36 is a front view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730, and shows a transition state when the rotating member 730 is rotated with respect to the elevating base 720.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, the elevating base 720 includes a rear base 721 and a front base 722, and an intermediate base 723 interposed on the lower ends of the rear base 721 and the front base 722, as described above. Further, the rotation shaft 731 a is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 721 b of the back surface base 721, so that the rotation member 730 is rotatably accommodated (arranged) between the opposing surfaces of the back surface base 721 and the front surface base 722.

  The rotating member 730 includes a curved rack gear 731b disposed on the back surface thereof. The curved rack gear 731b is formed as a rack gear engraved along a circumferential surface with a central angle of about 90 degrees centered on the axis of the rotating shaft 731a, and the transmission gear 781a meshes. Therefore, as described later, when the transmission gear 781a is rotated, the rotating member 730 is rotated with respect to the lifting base 720.

  The drive mechanism for rotating the rotary member 730 relative to the lifting base 720 includes transmission gears 781a and 781b rotatably held between the back surface base 721 and the intermediate base 723 in the lifting base 720, and the transmission gear 781b. When the drive shaft is connected, a drive motor 782 disposed on the front surface of the intermediate base 723 is provided.

  Here, in a state where the transmission gear 781a is meshed with the center in the circumferential direction of the curved rack gear 731b, the rotating member 730 has the direction of sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 (the direction of protrusion or retraction when retracted) as the vertical direction. (Refer to FIG. 36 (b)).

  Therefore, when the drive motor 782 is driven to rotate in the forward direction from the central rotation position and the transmission gears 781a and 781b are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotation member 730 is centered on the rotation shaft 731a. It is rotated in the positive direction (FIG. 36 (b) clockwise). As a result, the rotating member 730 is disposed in a posture in which the direction of sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 is tilted to one side (right side in FIG. 36C) (see FIG. 36C).

  From this state (see FIG. 36C), when the drive motor 782 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction and the transmission gears 781a and 782b are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotating member 730 is rotated. It rotates in the reverse direction (FIG. 36 (c) counterclockwise) centering on 731a. As a result, the rotating member 730 is disposed in a posture in which the direction of sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 is tilted to the other (left side in FIG. 36 (a)) after passing through the central rotational position (see FIG. 36 (a)). .

  Next, a structure for displacing the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732 in the rotating member 730 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 42.

  First, the overall configuration of the rotating member 730 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating member 730, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating member 730. FIG. 39 is a front view of the rotating member 730, and shows a transition state when the protruding member 735 is moved in and out of the rotating member 730 and the swinging member 732 is swung.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the rotating member 730 includes a rear base 731, a swinging member 732 that is swingably disposed in front of the rear base 731, the swinging member 732, and the rear base 731. An interposition member 733 interposed therebetween, a front base 734 disposed in front of the rear base 731, a projecting member 735 slidably disposed on the rear surface of the front base 734, and the front base And a drive mechanism for displacing (sliding and swinging) the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732 with respect to the rear base 731 and the rear base 731.

  The back base 731 is formed in a substantially circular container shape with the front open, and a part of the outer peripheral wall (the outer peripheral wall located above) is omitted, and the bottom of the outer peripheral wall is removed from the bottom. A part of the wall protrudes upward. As described above, the back surface of the back base 731 is curved to be engaged with the rotary shaft 731a supported by the shaft support hole 721b (see FIG. 35) of the elevating base 720 and the transmission gear 781a (see FIG. 35). A rack gear 731b is provided.

  In addition, a pair of shaft support holes 731c that rotatably support the rotation shaft 732a of the swing member 732 and a tip of the operated shaft 732b of the swing member 732 are slidably inserted into the back surface base 731. A pair of guide holes 731d and a slide hole 731e into which the slide pin 733b of the interposed member 733 is slidably inserted are formed.

  The shaft support hole 731c is formed as an opening having a circular cross section, and the guide hole 731d is formed as a groove-like opening curved in an arc shape around the axis of the shaft support hole 731c. The vertical position is set to a different position. Therefore, by sliding the tip of the actuated shaft 732d of the swinging member 732 along the guide hole 731d, the swinging member 732 can be swung (rotated) so that the tip side thereof moves up and down.

  The slide hole 731e is formed as a groove-like opening that extends in a straight line. The axis of the rotary shaft 731a is positioned on an extension line in the extending direction, and a slide hole 734a of the front base 734, which will be described later. They are formed in parallel. A pair of the shaft support hole 731c and the guide hole 731d is arranged symmetrically with respect to an imaginary line along the extending direction of the slide hole 731e.

  The oscillating member 732 includes a rotating shaft 732a and an actuated shaft 732b formed as a cylindrical shaft body, and has a posture in which base ends on which the rotating shaft 732a and the actuated shaft 732b are disposed face each other. A pair is arranged. The rotating shaft 732a is rotatably supported in a shaft supporting hole 731c of the back surface base 731, and the operated shaft 732b is slidably inserted into the operating hole 733a of the interposed member 733 and the guide hole 731d of the back surface base 731. Is done.

  The collar C is fastened and fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 732a, the flange portion of the collar C is used to prevent the rotation shaft 732a from being detached, and the body portion of the collar C is formed between the rotation shaft 732a and the shaft support hole 731c. It is slidably interposed between them. Similarly, the collar C is fastened and fixed to the tip of the actuated shaft 732d, the flange portion of the collar C is used to prevent the actuated shaft 732d from coming off, and the body of the collar C is connected to the actuated shaft 732d and the guide hole. 731d and the working hole 733a are slidably interposed.

  The interposed member 733 is a plate-like portion interposed between the back base 731 and the swinging member 732, and includes an action hole 733a, a slide pin 733b, and a sliding wall 733c. The action hole 733a is a hole for transmitting the raising / lowering (sliding displacement in the vertical direction) of the interposing member 733 to the actuated shaft 732b of the swinging member 732, and the pair is oriented in a C shape when viewed from the front. They are arranged in line symmetry.

  As will be described later, when the interposition member 733 is raised (sliding upward), the inner peripheral surface of the action hole 733a pushes up the actuated shaft 732b, and the swinging member 732 lifts the tip side. When the interposition member 733 is lowered (sliding downward), the inner peripheral surface of the action hole 733a pushes down the actuated shaft 732b, and the swing member 732 The tip is swung (rotated) in the direction of swinging down.

  The slide pin 733 b is a cylindrical portion that is slidably inserted into the slide hole 731 e of the back surface base 731, and a plurality (two in the present embodiment) protrude from the back surface of the interposed member 733. At the same time, they are arranged on the symmetry line of the pair of working holes 733a described above with a predetermined interval. Therefore, the interposition member 733 is moved up and down along the extending direction of the slide hole 731e of the back surface base 731 via the slide pin 733b.

  The sliding wall 733c is formed so as to protrude from the front surface of the interposition member 733 as a plate-like portion having a bottom surface extending along the horizontal direction (direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement of the interposition member 733). A cam portion 761b of a driving body 761 in a driving mechanism described later is in contact with the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c.

  Therefore, when the driving body 761 is rotated and the cam portion 761b is slid on the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b (distance from the rotation center of the driving body 761 to the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c). In response to the change (increase / decrease), the interposed member 733 is moved up and down (sliding upward or downward). That is, when the cam diameter is increased with the rotation of the driving body 761, the interposed member 733 is pushed upward by the cam portion 761b, while when the cam diameter is decreased, the interposed member 733 is lowered by its own weight.

  An urging spring 791 made of a metal coil spring is interposed between the back base 731 and the interposing member 733 in an elastically extended state, and the elastic restoring force of the urging spring 791 is as follows. It acts as a biasing force in the direction of lowering (sliding downward) the interposed member 733. That is, the descent (sliding downward) of the interposed member 733 is assisted by the urging force of the urging spring 791 in addition to the action of gravity (self-weight of the interposed member 733). Thereby, as will be described later, the swinging member 732 can be quickly swung (rotated) in the tilting direction (the direction in which the tip is lowered).

  The front base 734 is a plate-like body that is circular when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the front surface (end surface of the outer peripheral wall) of the rear base 731. The front base 734 is formed with a slide hole 734a through which the slide pin 735a of the protruding member 735 is slidably inserted. The slide hole 734 a is formed as a groove-like opening extending linearly, and is formed in parallel with the slide hole 731 e of the back surface base 731.

  The protruding member 735 is a long plate-like body disposed on the back side of the front base 734 so as to be slidable and includes a slide pin 735a and a sliding hole 735b. The slide pin 735a is a cylindrical portion that is slidably inserted into the slide hole 734a of the front base 734, and a plurality (two in the present embodiment) protrude from the front of the protruding member 735. These are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the protruding member 735 with a predetermined interval therebetween. Therefore, the protruding member 735 is raised and lowered along the extending direction of the slide hole 734a of the front base 734 via the slide pin 735a. A holding plate 736 is fastened and fixed to the tip of the slide pin 735a to prevent the slide pin 735a from coming off.

  The sliding hole 735b is a groove-shaped opening formed on one end side (base end side) in the longitudinal direction of the protruding member 735, and a sliding pin 761c of a driving body 761 in a driving mechanism described later is slidably inserted. The Therefore, when the driving body 761 is rotated and the sliding pin 761c is slid along the sliding hole 735b, the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 735b is pushed up or pushed down by the sliding pin 761c. As a result, the projecting member 735 is moved up and down (sliding upward or downward) along the slide hole 734a.

  An urging spring 792 made of a metal torsion spring is interposed between the front base 734 and the protruding member 735 in an elastically torsionally deformed state, and the elastic restoring force of the urging spring 792 is as follows. , Acting as an urging force in the direction of lowering the projecting member 735 (sliding downward).

  A driving mechanism for displacing the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 (sliding displacement and swinging) includes a driving body 761 rotatably disposed on the front surface of the rear base 731 and a driven gear of the driving body 761. The transmission gear 762a to 762e to which the rear transmission gear 762d is connected to 761a, and the drive shaft is connected to the leading transmission gear 762a of the transmission gears 762a to 762e and disposed on the back surface of the rear base 731. A drive motor 763;

  The cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 is a part formed as a disc cam in which a curved surface corresponding to the rotational position of the driving body 761 is formed on the outer peripheral surface. The interposition member 733 is driven (slidably displaced) by sliding on the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c of the interposition member 733. Further, the sliding pin 761c of the driving body 761 is formed at a position eccentric from the rotation center of the driving body 761, and as described above, the sliding pin 761c protrudes by acting on the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735. The member 735 is driven (slidingly displaced).

  The transmission gears 762a to 762e are a gear group for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 763 to the driving body 761, and are connected in series (engaged) so that the transmission gear 762a starts at the transmission gear 762e. 1 gear train (gear train) is formed.

  Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 763 is rotationally driven in the forward direction from the state shown in FIG. 39 (a), the rotational driving force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 762a to the trailing transmission gear 762e. The driving body 761 in which the driven gear 761a meshes with the transmission gear 762e is rotated in one direction.

  When the driving body 761 is rotated in one direction, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is reduced, and the interposed member 733 is lowered by its own weight. Along with this, the actuated shaft 732b of the swinging member 732 supported by the action hole 733a of the interposing member 733 can also be lowered, so that the swinging member 732 has its tip side lowered downward by its own weight. Is swung (rotated) in the direction of displacement (see FIGS. 39B and 39C).

  Further, when the drive body 761 described above is rotated in one direction, the position of the slide pin 761c is raised. Accordingly, the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 is pushed up by the sliding pin 761c, and the protruding member 735 is lifted (sliding upward) (see FIGS. 39B and 39C).

  On the other hand, when the drive motor 763 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction from the state shown in FIG. 39 (c), the drive body 761 is rotated in the other direction. In this case, when the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is increased and the interposed member 733 is raised, the operated shaft 732b of the swinging member 732 is pushed up by the action hole 733a of the interposed member 733, and the swinging member 733 is swung. The moving member 732 is swung (rotated) in a direction that displaces the tip side upward.

  Further, when the driving body 761 described above is rotated in the other direction, the vertical position of the sliding pin 761c is lowered. Accordingly, the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 is pushed down by the sliding pin 761c, and the protruding member 735 is lowered (sliding downward).

  Next, the details of the structure for displacing the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732 in the rotating member 730 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42.

  FIG. 40A is a front view of the drive body 761 in a state arranged at the first rotation position, and FIG. 40B is a front view of the drive body 761 in a state arranged at the second rotation position. is there. In FIGS. 40A and 40B, the sliding wall 733c of the interposed member 733 and the sliding of the protruding member 735 in a state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the first rotational position or the second rotational position. The hole 735b is schematically illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B, the cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 is a cam surface that comes into contact with the sliding wall 733c in a state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the first rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R1) at (position P1) is set to the maximum diameter, and the cam surface (position P2) abutted against the sliding wall 733c in a state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the second rotational position. The cam diameter (radius R2) is set to the minimum diameter, and the cam diameter is continuously reduced from the position P1 toward the position P2.

  As described above, the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c (the lower surface in FIGS. 40A and 40B) is in the horizontal direction (the direction perpendicular to the direction of sliding displacement of the interposition member 733), FIG. (A) and FIG. 40 (b) in the left-right direction). Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (that is, the interposed member 733) is changed from the top to the bottom when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by the action of the cam portion 761b. When the drive body 761 is continuously lowered from below to the first rotation position from the second rotation position, it is continuously raised from the bottom to the top.

  The sliding hole 735b includes a curved portion 735b1 extending from one end side (right side of FIG. 40A) of the sliding hole 735b to a predetermined range, and the other end of the sliding hole 735b from the end of the curved portion 735b1. It is formed from a straight line portion 735b2 extending in a range up to the side (left side in FIG. 40 (a)).

  The curved portion 735b1 is formed to be curved in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the drive body 761 in a state where the drive body 761 is disposed at the first rotation position. In the first rotation position, the sliding pin 761c is positioned on one end side of the sliding hole 735b. Therefore, while the drive body 761 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle from the first rotation position to the second rotation position (that is, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1), the drive body 761 slides. The driving force is not transmitted to the moving hole 735b (that is, the protruding member 735). That is, the vertical position of the sliding hole 735b is not changed, and thus the protruding member 735 is maintained in a state where it is stopped at the lowest position.

  The rotational position where the driving body 761 is rotated by a predetermined rotational angle from the first rotational position (that is, the rotational position where the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 and reaches the linear portion 735b2) is referred to as “predetermined rotational position”. ".

  The straight line portion 735b2 is formed in a straight line shape along the horizontal direction (the direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the projecting member 735, the left-right direction in FIGS. 40A and 40B). Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding hole 735b (that is, the protruding member 735) is such that the driving body 761 is in the second rotational position by the action of the sliding pin 761c while the sliding pin 761c passes through the linear portion 735b2. When the drive body 761 is rotated toward the first rotation position, it is continuously lowered from the uppermost position to the lowermost position.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the driving body 761 is disposed at the second rotational position (see FIG. 40B), the sliding pin 761c does not enter the bending portion 735b1 and is predetermined on the straight portion 735b2. It is located at the position (the end on the connection side with the bending portion 735b1).

  That is, when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the sliding pin 761c passes through the bending portion 735b1 and then enters the linear portion 735b2 and ends (slids) the linear portion 735b2. After sliding toward the other end side (left side of FIG. 40 (a)) of the moving hole 735b, the direction is changed at the end, and the straight portion 735b2 is slid toward the bending portion 735b1, but the bending portion 735b1 It is stopped immediately before entering (that is, on the straight portion 735b2). Thereby, as will be described later, the driving force required for the drive motor 763 can be suppressed.

  41 and 42 are schematic front views of the rotating member 730, and a transition state when the projecting member 735 is slid and the swinging member 732 is swung is illustrated. 41 and 42, only a part of the configuration of the rotating member 730 is schematically illustrated. 41A shows a state in which the driving body 761 is disposed at the first rotation position, and FIG. 41B shows a state in which the driving body 761 is disposed at the predetermined rotation position. FIG. 42B shows a state where the driving body 761 is disposed at a rotational position between the predetermined rotational position and the second rotational position, and FIG. 42B illustrates a state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the second rotational position. Is done.

  In the state shown in FIG. 41A (that is, the state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the first rotation position), the tip of the swinging member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position, and the protruding member 735 is positioned at the lowermost position. Is done. When the driving body 761 is rotated from this state to the predetermined rotational position, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is gradually decreased from the radius R1 which is the maximum diameter (FIG. 40). (See (a)), the interposed member 733 is lowered by its own weight, and accordingly, the swinging member 732 is rotated by its own weight in the direction of lowering its tip.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 41B, the projecting member 735 has the sliding pin 761c passing through the curved portion 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b while the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the predetermined rotation position. Therefore, the driving force from the driving body 761 is not transmitted and is maintained in a stopped state at the lowermost position (that is, the same position as in FIG. 41A).

  When the driving body 761 that has reached the predetermined rotational position (see FIG. 41B) is further rotated toward the second rotational position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b further increases as shown in FIG. By being reduced (see FIG. 40A), the interposed member 733 is lowered by its own weight, and accordingly, the swinging member 732 is further rotated by its own weight in the direction of lowering its tip. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is slid and displaced upward by the sliding pin 761c passing through the linear portion 735b2 of the sliding hole 735b pushing up the inner peripheral surface of the linear portion 735b2 as the driving body 761 rotates. The

  When the driving body 761 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 41 (b) to the second rotation position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is reduced to the minimum radius R2 as shown in FIG. 42 (b). As a result (see FIG. 40B), the interposition member 733 is lowered to its lowermost position by its own weight, and accordingly, the swinging member 732 is further rotated by its own weight and its tip is positioned at its lowermost position. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is positioned at the uppermost position as the linear portion 735b2 is pushed up to the uppermost position by the sliding pin 761c.

  Contrary to the case described above, when the driving body 761 is rotated in the reverse direction from the state shown in FIG. 42B (that is, the state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the second rotational position), FIG. ), When the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is gradually increased from the minimum radius R2 (see FIG. 40B), the interposed member 733 (sliding wall 733c) is lifted upward. Along with this, the swinging member 732 is rotated in the direction of raising its tip. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is slid downward by the sliding pin 761c passing through the linear portion 735b2 of the sliding hole 735b pushing down the inner peripheral surface of the linear portion 735b2 as the driving body 761 rotates. The

  When the driving body 761 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 42A to a predetermined rotational position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b has not yet reached the maximum diameter r1, as shown in FIG. The upward lifting operation of the installation member 733 (sliding wall 733c) is continued, and accordingly, the operation of the swinging member 732 being rotated in the direction of raising the tip thereof is also continued. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is positioned at the lowermost position by the linear portion 735b2 being pushed down to the lowermost position by the sliding pin 761c.

  When the driving body 761 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 41B to the first rotation position, as shown in FIG. 41A, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is increased to the radius R1 which is the maximum diameter. As a result (see FIG. 40A), the interposition member 733 is pushed up to the uppermost position, and accordingly, the tip of the swinging member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position. On the other hand, since the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b, the projecting member 735 is not transmitted with the driving force from the driving body 761, and is located at the lowest position (that is, FIG. At the same position)).

  As described above, according to the rotating member 730, the two members (the swinging member 732 and the protruding member 735) can be displaced by one driving motor 763.

  Here, in the conventional product, when the two members are displaced by one drive motor, the driving force for driving each of the two members is duplicated, so that the load on the drive motor increases and the durability thereof decreases. There was a problem of inviting. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the two members are displaced alternately (one at a time), the load on the drive motor can be reduced, but the state in which the two members are displaced together cannot be formed, and the effect of the displacement is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the rotation member 730, the first transmission means (the cam portion 761b and the interposition member 733) that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the swing member 732 lowers the tip of the swing member 732. In the section (section in which the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotational position to the second rotational position), the load of the drive motor 763 is increased, and the section in which the tip of the swing member 732 is raised (the driving body 761 is moved from the second rotational position to the first position). It is possible to make the load smaller than the load of the drive motor 763 in the section of the rotation position.

  On the other hand, the second transmission means (sliding pin 761c and sliding hole 735b) for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 763 to the protruding member 735 is a section (sliding the driving body 761 in the second rotation) that slides the protruding member 735 downward. Drive in the section in which the projecting member 735 is slid upward (the section in which the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position). The load of the motor 763 can be made smaller.

  That is, according to the rotating member 730, when the first transmission means is a relatively high load, the second transmission means is a relatively low load, and when the first transmission means is a relatively high load. Can make the second transmission means have a relatively low load. Therefore, since the load of the drive motor 763 can be distributed, the load of the drive motor 763 can be reduced and the durability thereof can be improved.

  Further, it is not necessary to displace the swinging member 732 and the protruding member 735 alternately (one by one), and the swinging member 732 and the protruding member 735 can be in a state of being displaced together, thereby reducing the load on the drive motor 763. While striving, it is possible to improve the production effect due to the displacement of both members 732 and 735.

  The first transmission means displaces the swinging member 732 by interlocking the cam portion 761b and the sliding wall 733c, and the second transmission means causes the protruding member 735 to be interlocked by the sliding pin 761c and the sliding hole 735b. According to the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b, the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c swing per unit displacement amount (that is, per unit rotation of the driving body 761). The amount of displacement of the member 732 and the protruding member 735 can be changed. In other words, the load of the drive motor 763 can be changed. Therefore, even when the drive state (supply power) of the drive motor 763 is kept constant, it is possible to change the displacement speed of the swing member 732 and the protruding member 735. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced while suppressing the load on the drive motor 763.

  Further, it is a section in which the load of the drive motor 763 is reduced (in the first transmission means, a section in which the tip of the swinging member 732 is lowered (a section in which the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position). In the second transmission means, the section in which the projecting member 735 is slid downward (the section in which the driving body 761 is rotated from the second rotational position to the first rotational position) is gravity due to the displacement of the swing member 732 or the projecting member 735. It is formed by giving a displacement component downward in the direction, that is, using the displacement due to the weight of the swinging member 732 or the protruding member 735. Therefore, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b can be suppressed from becoming complicated. Thereby, reduction of component cost can be aimed at. Further, since the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b are prevented from being complicated, the speed of displacement of the swinging member 732 or the protruding member 735 can be easily made constant. The burden can be suppressed.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the cam portion 761b in the first transmission means and the sliding pin 761c in the second transmission means are integrally formed, so that the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c are separately arranged. Therefore, a space for the rotation member 730 can be eliminated, and the rotating member 730 can be downsized accordingly. Further, compared to the case where the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c are formed separately, the displacement of the swinging member 732 and the protruding member 735 is suppressed, and the synchronization accuracy of both the members 732 and 735 is increased. Can be increased.

  Here, when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position, that is, when the sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 in the stopped state is started, the driving motor 763 is affected by the inertial force. Since the load of the camera becomes large, the initial speed becomes slow, and there is a risk that the production effect is hindered. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a curved portion 735b1 is formed in the sliding hole 735b of the projecting member 735, and in the curved portion 735b1, the projecting member 735 (sliding hole 735b) from the driving body 761 (sliding pin 761c). ) Can be non-transmitted. Therefore, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1, the load on the drive motor 763 can be reduced, and accordingly, the rotation of the drive body 761 can be given momentum. The upward slide displacement can be started smoothly.

  On the other hand, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 (that is, while the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the predetermined rotation position), the protruding member 735 is maintained in the stopped state. However, the swinging member 732 is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the tip is lowered downward (see FIGS. 41A and 41B). Therefore, when the swinging member 732 is swung while maintaining the protruding member 735 in the stopped state, the driving force (load) of the drive motor 763 necessary for the swinging can be suppressed. As a result, since the momentum can be further increased in the rotation of the driving body 761, the upward sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 in the stopped state can be started smoothly.

  In addition, as described above, since the swinging member 732 can be swung while the protruding member 735 is maintained in the stopped state, both the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732 are stopped. By avoiding this, it is possible to improve the production effect due to the displacement.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the curved portion 735b1 is provided in the sliding hole 735b, and when the sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 is started, the curved portion 735b1 is used to rotate the driving body 761. By applying momentum to the protrusion member 735, the protruding member 735 is smoothly displaced from the stopped state.

  In this case, in this embodiment, after the sliding displacement of the projecting member 735 is started, the rotational driving of the driving body 761 is stopped before the sliding pin 761c enters the bending portion 735b1. That is, in the state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the second rotation position, the sliding pin 761c does not enter the bending portion 735b1, but at a predetermined position on the straight portion 735b2 (the end portion on the connection side with the bending portion 735b1). Is positioned (see FIG. 40 (b) and FIG. 42 (b)). Thereby, it can avoid that the load of the drive motor 763 becomes excessive.

  That is, when the guide groove of the crank friction member is formed in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member, the driving force of the driving means can be made non-transmitted (a non-transmitting section can be formed). In the structure in which the part reciprocates in the guide groove, the shape of the non-transmission section is a circular arc that protrudes toward the rotation center of the crank member from the state where the pin portion passes through the non-transmission section and changes direction at a predetermined position. It becomes. Therefore, when the pin portion after the direction change passes through the non-transmission section, not only the sliding resistance increases, but also the sliding displacement amount upward of the projecting member 735 per unit rotation of the driving body 761 increases rapidly. The load of the drive motor 763 becomes excessive. Therefore, by stopping the rotation of the driving body 761 before the sliding pin 761c reaches the bending portion 735b1, it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the driving motor 763.

  Next, the lifting unit 800 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52.

  First, the overall configuration of the lifting unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45. 43 (a) is a front view of the lifting unit 800, FIG. 43 (b) is a rear view of the lifting unit 800, and FIG. 43 (c) is a side view of the lifting unit 800. 44 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting unit 800, and FIG. 45 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting unit 800.

  As shown in FIG. 43 to FIG. 45, the lifting unit 800 has a horizontally long base member 810 disposed in front of the base member 510 in the upper united unit 500, and the base member 810 is movable up and down. The lift member 820 to be driven, a drive motor 891 for applying a drive force to the lift member 820, a transmission gear 840 for transmitting the drive force of rotation of the drive motor 891, and one end of the base member 810 are pivotally supported. A link member 850 that is rotatably arranged around the shaft support portion by rotation of the transmission gear 840, a slide member 860 that is connected to the link member 850 and is slidably displaceable by displacement of the link member 850, and A transmission member 870 for transmitting the slide displacement of the slide member 860 to the elevating member 820 is mainly provided.

  The base member 810 includes sliding holes 811, 812, and 813 that are formed through the central portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 43B) in the front-rear direction, and shaft support pins 814 to 817 that protrude in a columnar shape on the back side. And is mainly provided.

  Each sliding hole 811, 812, 813 is a hole for restricting the sliding direction of the sliding member 860 by inserting sliding pins 861, 862, 863, which will be described later, into the inside thereof, and the direction of gravity (see FIG. 43 (b) is formed in a long hole shape that opens long in the vertical direction. Therefore, the slide member 860 can be slidably disposed along the longitudinal direction of the slide holes 811, 812, and 813.

  Each sliding hole 811, 812, 813 is formed side by side, a sliding hole 811 is formed at the center, and a sliding hole 812 and a sliding hole 813 are formed on both sides of the sliding hole 811. . In other words, the sliding hole 811 is formed between the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813.

  The shaft support pins 814 to 816 are protrusions that are inserted into the shafts of the gears 842 to 844 of the transmission gear 840, which will be described later, and rotatably support the gears 842 to 844. It is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the hole formed to penetrate.

  The shaft support pin 817 is a protrusion that is inserted into a through hole 851 that is formed to penetrate one end of a link member 850, which will be described later, and rotatably supports the link member 850, and has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 851. It is formed in a cylindrical shape.

  As described above, the drive motor 891 is a drive source that applies a drive force to the elevating member 820. The drive motor 891 is disposed on the base member 810 via a back cover 892 formed of a plate-like body on the back side of the base member 810. The shaft of the drive motor 891 is inserted into a through hole 892a formed through the back cover 892, and is fitted into the shaft of the gear 841 of the transmission gear 840 through the through hole 892a. Therefore, when a rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor 891, the gear 841 connected to the shaft of the drive motor 891 is rotated.

  The transmission gear 840 is a gear train configured by connecting the gears 841 to 844, and as described above, the gears 842 to 844 are rotatable to the pivot pins 814 to 816 that protrude to the back side of the base member 810. Is pivotally supported. Therefore, when the gear 841 is rotated, the driving force is transmitted to the terminal gear 844 via the gear 842 and the gear 843. Therefore, the terminal gear 844 can be rotated by driving the drive motor 891.

  The gear 844 is formed with a protrusion 844a protruding in a cylindrical shape on the back side. The protrusion 844a is a protrusion for transmitting a driving force to a link member 850, which will be described later.

  The link member 850 is formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate. The link member 850 has a through hole 851 that passes through in a circular shape at one end, a transmission-side sliding groove 854 that passes through the other end in a long hole shape substantially in the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the link member 850, the through hole 851, and the transmission. The connecting side sliding groove 853 formed between the side sliding grooves 854 is mainly provided.

  As described above, the through-hole 851 is a through-hole through which the shaft support pin 817 of the base member 810 is inserted to rotatably support the link member 850 with respect to the base member 810. The pin 817 has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter. Therefore, the link member 850 is connected to the base member 810 so as not to fall off by the shaft support pin 817 of the base member 810 being inserted into the through hole 851 and the collar C3 being inserted from the back side and being fastened with screws or the like. Is done.

  An annular portion 852 that protrudes in an annular shape is formed on the front side (FIG. 43B, the back side of the paper surface) at the edge of the through hole 851 in the link member 850. The annular portion 852 is a gap forming member for forming a predetermined gap between the base member 810 and the link member 850 and rotatably accommodating the transmission gear 840 in the gap. The protruding dimension is set larger than the thickness width of the gears 841 to 844.

  In addition, a torsion spring SP1 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the annular portion 852. The torsion spring SP1 is formed by overlapping a wire made of a metal material around a cylindrical spiral, and can apply a biasing force in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the annular portion 852 is set to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the inner edge portion wound around the spiral of the torsion spring SP1. As a result, when the torsion spring SP1 is twisted, the state of being wound around the spiral of the torsion spring SP1 collapses, and the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is changed in the axial direction of the spiral portion of the torsion spring SP1 (the axial direction of the annular portion 852 ) Can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the cylindrical spiral portion is a relatively large torsion spring SP1, the annular portion 852 can suppress the collapse of the spiral state and stabilize the urging direction.

  That is, the annular portion 852 not only forms a space for disposing the transmission gear 840 between the base member 810 and the link member 850, but also serves to stabilize the urging direction of the torsion spring SP1. Can do.

  One end of the torsion spring SP1 is engaged with a locking portion 855 that protrudes in a hook shape from the front side of the link member 850, and the other end is engaged with a locking portion 818 that protrudes in a hook shape from the back side of the base member 810. Engaged. Therefore, the shape of the torsion spring SP1 is elastically deformed by the rotational displacement of the link member 850, and an urging force can be applied to the link member 850 in the direction around the axis of the rotation shaft.

  The connecting side sliding groove 853 is a long hole into which the projection 844a of the gear 844 is inserted, and the width of the inner peripheral surface in the short direction is smaller than the outer diameter of the projection 844a. Therefore, when the projection 844a is displaced by the rotation of the gear 844, the projection 844a can be displaced by sliding inside the connection side sliding groove 853. Accordingly, the link member 850 can be rotationally displaced about the through hole 851 with the displacement of the protrusion 844a. The detailed displacement mode of the link member 850 will be described later.

  The transmission-side sliding groove 854 is a hole through which the sliding pin 861 of the sliding member 860 is inserted to displace the sliding member 860 in accordance with the rotational displacement of the link member 850, and the width dimension in the short direction thereof. However, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the sliding pin 861. Therefore, the slide pin 861 of the slide member 860 inserted through the slide hole 811 of the base member 810 can be inserted into the transmission side slide groove 854.

  Further, the link member 850 and the slide member 860 can be connected to each other with the base member 810 interposed therebetween by fastening the collar C3 with a screw or the like from the back side of the link member 850 to the tip of the shaft support pin 816. Therefore, the slide member 860 disposed on the front side of the base member 810 can be slid by the rotational displacement of the link member 850 disposed on the back side of the base member 810.

  The slide member 860 is formed in a plate-like body that is vertically long when viewed from the front, and the length dimension in the gravitational direction is set to be smaller than the length dimension of the base member 810 in the gravitational direction. Therefore, when the slide member 860 and the base member 810 are overlapped in the front-rear direction, the slide member 860 can be prevented from protruding outward from the outer edge portion of the base member 810. Thereby, the external form of the whole raising / lowering unit 800 in front view can be made small.

  The slide member 860 includes a plurality of slide pins 861 to 863 that are formed to protrude in a columnar shape from the back side, a plurality of slide side slide holes 864 to 866 that are formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and a circle that protrudes to the front side. It is mainly provided with two columnar protrusions 867.

  As described above, the sliding pin 861 is inserted into the transmission side sliding groove 854 of the link member 850 and can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the transmission side sliding groove 854. The sliding pin 862 and the sliding pin 863 are protrusions that regulate the displacement direction of the sliding member 860, and are inserted into the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813 of the base member 810, and the sliding pin 862 and the sliding pin are inserted. The collar C3 is fastened to the tip of the moving pin 863 from the back side of the base member 810 with a screw or the like.

  Therefore, the slide pin 862 and the slide pin 863 of the slide member 860 are inserted into the slide hole 812 and the slide hole 813 formed through the base member 810 in a straight long hole shape. The base member 810 is made non-rotatable and is slidably connected in the long hole direction of the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813. As a result, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 851, whereby the slide member 860 can be displaced in the direction of gravity (the long hole direction of the slide hole 812 and the slide hole 813).

  The plurality of slide-side slide holes 864 to 866 are holes into which protrusions 871a to 871c of the second slide member 871 described later are inserted, and are formed in a long hole shape that is long in the gravity direction, and have a width dimension in the short direction. The protrusions 871a to 871c are formed smaller than the outer diameter.

  The transmission member 870 is a member that is disposed on the front side of the slide member 860, and is engaged with racks 872 that extend in the direction of gravity and that are paired with the target, and rack gears of the racks 872. Each pinion gear 873 is mainly provided with a second slide member 871 disposed between the pinion gears 873.

  The rack 872 is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the base member 810. In addition, a pair of racks 872 are arranged symmetrically about the central portion of the base member 810. A rack gear 872a is engraved on the opposite side surface of each rack 872, and meshes with a pinion gear 873 described later.

  The pinion gear 873 is rotatably supported by the protrusion 867 of the slide member 860 and meshed with the rack gear 872a of the rack 872. Therefore, when the slide member 860 is slid in the gravitational direction, the pinion gear 873 is similarly displaced in the gravitational direction. At this time, the pinion gear 873 is rotatably supported by the slide member 860 and meshed with the rack gear 872a, so that the pinion gear 873 is rotated in accordance with the displacement of the slide member 860.

  The second slide member 871 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is provided with a standing portion 871e that is bent and standing at the lower end, and rack gears 871d that are engraved on both sides in the left-right direction. A plurality of protrusions 871a to 871c protruding in a columnar shape are mainly provided on the back side.

  The standing portion 871e is a wall portion to which an elevating member 820, which will be described later, is fastened to the standing tip surface, and a connecting hole 871e1 for passing a screw through the tip portion and fastening with the elevating member 820 passes therethrough. It is formed. Therefore, the 2nd slide member 871 and the raising / lowering member 820 can be fastened.

  The standing portion 871e is a gap forming portion for forming a gap between the elevating member 820 and the base member 810 and disposing a decoration member 830 described later in the gap, and the front-rear direction of the decoration member 830 The standing dimension is set to be larger than the thickness. Thereby, the decoration member 830 can be disposed between the elevating member 820 and the base member 810.

  The rack gear 871d is a meshing surface that meshes with the above-described pinion gear 873, and is engraved on both left and right side surfaces of the second slide member 871. That is, the length dimension in the left-right direction of the second slide member 871 is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension between the two pinion gears 873.

  As described above, the plurality of protrusions 871a to 871c are inserted into the slide-side sliding holes 864 to 866 of the slide member 860, and slide from the back side of the slide member 860 to the tip side of the protrusions 871a to 871c. The collar C4 is inserted inside the side sliding holes 864 to 866 and fastened with screws or the like. Thus, the second slide member 871 is rotatable with respect to the slide member 860 and is slidably held along the longitudinal direction of the slide side slide holes 864 to 866.

  Therefore, when the slide member 860 is displaced, the pinion gear 873 is rotated as described above, and accordingly, the second slide member 871 that meshes with the pinion gear 873 can be slid and displaced. Therefore, the second slide member 871 slides in the gravitational direction with respect to the slide member 860, so that the base member 810 can be displaced at a displacement speed faster than the displacement speed of the slide member 860 and the slide. The distance displaced from the member 860 can be increased. Accordingly, the size of the lifting unit 800 as a unit can be reduced, and the displacement speed and displacement distance of the lifting member 820 fastened to the second slide member 871 can be suppressed.

  As described above, the elevating member 820 is a member that is displaced up and down with the displacement of the second slide member 871, and is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front. The elevating member 820 includes a protrusion 821 protruding to the back side.

  The protrusion 821 is a protrusion connected to the standing portion 871e of the second slide member 871, and is formed to protrude at a position facing the connecting hole 871e1 of the standing portion. Further, a fastening hole 821a for screwing is formed on the protruding tip surface, and a screw inserted into the inside of the connection hole 871e1 can be fastened by the fastening hole 821a. Thereby, the 2nd slide member 871 and the raising / lowering member 820 can be fastened and fixed.

  A cover member 880 and a decorative member 830 are disposed on the front side of the transmission member 870. The cover member 880 is a plate member that restricts the transmission member 870 from being displaced to the front side, and thereby, the transmission member 870 can be prevented from being displaced to the front side and colliding with the decoration member 830.

  The decorative member 830 is formed in a shape simulating a title or logo of a gaming machine, and an LED that emits light is disposed on the back side. Thereby, light can be emitted from the title, logo, etc. to the player side to give the player interest.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 52, the movable state of the elevating unit 800 will be described.

  46 is a front view of the lifting unit 800 in the first state, FIG. 47 is a front view of the lifting unit 800 in the second state, and FIG. 48 is a front view of the lifting unit 800 in the third state. . 49 is a rear view of the lifting unit 800 in the first state, FIG. 50 is a rear view of the lifting unit 800 in the second state, and FIG. 51 is a rear view of the lifting unit 800 in the third state. . 52A is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member 850 in the first state, and FIG. 52B is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member in the second state. FIG. 52C is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member 850 in the third state.

  The first state of the elevating unit 800 is a state in which the elevating member 820 is positioned on the uppermost side and disposed on the front side of the decorative member 830 and the base member 810, and the third state is an elevating member 820. It is a state located at the lowermost position and disposed below the decorative member 830 and the base member 810. The second state is a state in which the elevating member 820 is disposed at an intermediate position between the first state and the third state. is there.

  Further, in FIG. 51, the displacement trajectory of the rotating members 435 and 455 placed at the end most distant from the rotating shaft of the rotating members 435 and 455 is shown by a two-dot chain line, and the reference numeral KS3 is given. .

  As shown in FIGS. 46, 49, and 52A, when the lifting unit 800 is positioned in the first state, the other end side of the link member 850 (the side on which the transmission side sliding groove 854 is formed). However, it is located above the one end side (the side where the through hole 851 is formed) in the direction of gravity. In this case, in the transmission member 870, the pinion gear 873 is engaged with the upper end portion of the rack 872, and the pinion gear 873 is engaged with the lower end portion of the second slide member. In other words, the second slide member 871 is positioned above. Accordingly, the elevating member 820 connected to the second slide member 871 is also located at the upper position.

  In the first state, the imaginary line KS1 that connects the shaft of the terminal gear 844 and the projection 844a of the transmission gear 840 that transmits the driving force from the drive motor 891 to the link member 850, and the shaft of the through hole 851 of the link member 850 And the virtual line KS2 connecting the intermediate position in the short direction of the connecting side sliding groove 853 is a position orthogonal (see FIG. 49).

  That is, in the first state, the link member 850 and the terminal gear 844 of the transmission gear 840 are in a dead center relationship. Therefore, the elevating member 820 can be held by the connecting side sliding groove 853 of the link member 850 and the protrusion 844a of the gear 844. Therefore, even if the driving force of the drive motor 891 is turned off, the link member 850 can be prevented from being displaced by the load of the elevating member 820. As a result, the first state can be maintained without applying electric power to the lifting unit 800 in the first state, so that energy consumption can be reduced.

  When electric power is applied to the drive motor 891 from the state shown in FIGS. 46, 49 and 52 (a) and a rotational driving force is applied, as described above, the gears 841 to 844 of the transmission gear 840 are rotated and Driving force is transmitted. The position of the protrusion 844a of the terminal gear 844 is displaced as the rotation is driven. The protrusion 844a is inserted and connected to the inside of the connecting side sliding groove 853 of the link member 850. Therefore, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851 as the projection 844a is displaced.

  When the link member 850 is rotationally displaced, the slide member 860 inserted and connected to the slide pin 861 in the transmission-side slide groove 854 of the link member 850 is slid. Thereby, the pinion gear 873 of the transmission member 870 pivotally supported by the projection 867 of the slide member 860 can be displaced. Therefore, the pinion gear 873 can be rotated by the rack gear 872a formed on the rack 872 according to the displacement. Therefore, the second slide member 871 disposed between the two pinion gears 873 can be slid. As a result, the elevating member 820 can be displaced.

  As shown in FIGS. 47, 50, and 52 (b), in the lifting unit 800 in the second state, the link motor 850 is rotated and displaced about the axis of the through hole 851 when the drive motor 891 is rotated. It is assumed that Therefore, the elevating member 820 can be displaced downward relative to the base member 810 from the first state.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 48, 51 and 52 (c). The elevating unit 800 in the third state is such that the drive motor 891 is further rotated from the second state, and the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851. Therefore, similarly to the displacement from the first state to the second state, the elevating member 820 can be displaced downward relative to the base member 810 than in the second state.

  In this case, the elevating member 820 is disposed at a position adjacent to the lower side of the decorative member 830. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the title and logo of the gaming machine formed on the decorative member 830. Further, the elevating member 820 is adjacent to the lower side of the decorative member 830, so that the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830 can be combined to form one pattern (character). That is, the pattern (character) which combined the raising / lowering member 820 and the decoration member 830 of the raising / lowering unit 800 can be displayed ahead of the game area by displacing the raising / lowering unit 800 from the first state to the third state. it can.

  Further, in the third state, the slide pins 861 to 863 of the slide member 860 are positioned at the descending ends of the slide holes 811 to 813 of the base member 810. Therefore, since the load of the elevating member 820 can be held by the three sliding pins 861 to 863, it is possible to suppress the load of the elevating member 820 from acting on the protrusion 844a of the gear 844 in the transmission gear 840. As a result, the gear 844 can be prevented from being damaged.

  Next, the combined state of the movable units (slide unit 400, protruding unit 700, and lifting unit 800) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, a state in which each movable unit is displaced and each movable unit is displaced to the central portion of the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 53 is a front view of the operation unit 200 in the combined state. 54 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit 200 taken along the line LIV-LIV in FIG.

  53, the united state shown in FIG. 53 is that the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 moves up and down with respect to the base member 710, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced to the center, and the elevating member of the elevating unit 800. This is a state where 820 is displaced downward with respect to the base member 810. In this way, each member (elevating base 720, rotating members 435, 455, and elevating member 820) of each movable unit (projection unit 700, slide unit 400, and elevating unit 800) is brought close to each other to form one pattern ( The title can be visually recognized by the player as a gaming machine 10 title, logo, character, or the like.

  Each movable unit is formed in a shape in which each member imitates a pattern. For example, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are formed in a shape simulating an animal's wings, and the lifting base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 are formed in a bow-shaped shape. The elevating member 820 is formed in a shape imitating the title of a gaming machine.

  Further, as described above, the elevating unit 800 can form one pattern (character) by combining the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830, so that the elevating base 720, the rotating member 435, and the like in the combined state (overhanging state). 455, the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830 can be combined to form one pattern (character).

  That is, the elevating unit 800 not only combines the elevating base 820 and the decorative member 830 to form one display surface, but also other movable units (the projecting unit 700 and the slide unit 400) disposed in the operation unit 200. And a single display surface. As a result, a plurality of display forms can be formed by changing the displacement state of each movable unit (elevating unit 800, projecting unit 700, and slide unit 400) arranged in the operation unit 200. Can be given.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the operation unit 200 in the combined state includes a lifting member 820 of the lifting unit 800 and a part of each of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 54). It is arranged at the overlapping position. That is, the elevating member 820 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are disposed at different positions in the front-rear direction. In addition, the raising / lowering member 820 is arrange | positioned in the front side (left side of FIG. 54) of each rotating member 435,455 (refer FIG. 54).

  In other words, the operation unit 200 includes a projecting unit 700, a slide unit 400, and an elevating unit 800 that are formed to be displaceable at a retracted position and a combined (extended) position. The unit 700 and the slide unit 400 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the projection unit 700, the slide unit 400, and the lifting unit 800 of the three movable units can be displaced to form one pattern, a larger pattern (character) can be formed, and the production effect can be enhanced accordingly. it can.

  In this case, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is arranged at different positions in the protruding position from the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700 and the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400. It does not come into contact with the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455. That is, when the members abut against each other in the overhang position, or when there is a possibility of abutting, the lifting member 820 needs to be set in consideration of the damage caused by the impact at the time of contact. And since it does not contact | abut with the rotation members 435 and 455, the displacement speed can be made comparatively quick. As a result, for example, it is possible to form a mode in which the subsequent raising / lowering member 820 is displaced so as to catch up with the first rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 at the overhang position, and a production effect is achieved when a pattern (character) is formed. Can be increased.

  In addition, the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 is disposed on the back side of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide members 430 and 450 in the slide unit 400. Accordingly, when the slide members 430 and 450 are displaced and the displacement operation is continued without stopping at the original stop position due to a failure or malfunction, the rotating members 435 and 455 are moved to the projecting member 735. It can suppress contacting. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protruding member 735 and the rotating members 435 and 455 from being damaged.

  Here, when a plurality of movable units (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and projecting unit 700) are movable and united in a space in the center of the gaming machine (in front of the third symbol display device 81), the side surfaces thereof There is a gaming machine that combines each other by colliding each other. However, when the side surfaces collide with each other, scratches are easily formed on the collision surface due to the collision. Therefore, there exists a problem that the designability of a movable unit tends to be impaired.

  Moreover, in order to suppress the formation of scratches on the collision surface, it is conceivable to reduce the collision speed. However, since the displacement speed of the movable unit needs to be reduced, the speed of the combination operation of the accessory is reduced. It ’s going down. There is a problem that the interest of the player is impaired.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the plurality of movable units (the lifting unit 800, the slide unit 400, and the protruding unit 700) are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction. When displaced into the central space of the gaming machine and merged, the sides of each other do not collide. Therefore, it can suppress that a damage | wound is formed in a movable unit and it can suppress that the designability of a movable unit is impaired.

  Furthermore, since the side surfaces do not collide when the movable unit is displaced into the central space of the gaming machine and merged, the speed of displacement can be made constant when the merged is displaced. As a result, it can suppress that the speed | rate of combination operation | movement of an accessory falls, and can suppress that a player's interest is impaired.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the left slide member 430 of the lift unit 800 and the slide unit 400 is a two-stage rack (the lift unit 800 has a pinion gear between the rack 872 and the second slide member 871. The slide unit 400 is configured in such a manner that the first side pinion gear 432 is interposed between the first member 431 and the second member 433 (see FIG. 13). Therefore, the speed of the displacement operation can be improved as compared with the rack of the type (a configuration composed only of the rack and the pinion), and therefore each operation unit (the lifting unit 800, the slide unit 400, and the protruding unit 700) can be improved by increasing the displacement speed. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time that the player can visually recognize the uniting operation. It is possible to prevent the player's interest is impaired.

  Here, if each movable unit (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and projecting unit 700) is disposed at a different position in the front-rear direction, the front-rear dimension increases and the size increases. If the longitudinal dimensions of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are reduced (thinned) in order to suppress such longitudinal dimensions, it is difficult to ensure the configuration.

  On the other hand, the elevating member 820 includes the second slide member 871 formed to extend to the same side as the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455, so that the entire elevating member 820 (rotating member 820, rotating The size in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine 10 is reduced while suppressing the size in the front-rear direction as the total of the member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455), and the rigidity in the front-rear direction is increased by increasing the size in the front-rear direction. Can be secured.

  Further, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is disposed at a position protruding to the front side by the second slide member 871, and the second slide member 871 and the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are arranged in the front-rear direction. Arranged at overlapping positions. Thereby, the space on the back side of the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 can be increased, and the width of the front and rear direction (left and right direction in FIG. 54) can be reduced. That is, the elevating unit 800 and the slide unit 400 are arranged by arranging the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 at the same position in the front-rear direction as the second slide member 871 having a small width in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 53). , And the width that increases in the front-rear direction can be reduced (see FIG. 54). Since the second slide member 871 is formed to have a small width in the left-right direction, the second slide member 871 and the rotation member 871 can be prevented from intersecting the displacement trajectory of the rotation of the rotation members 435 and 455. Collisions at the time of displacement can be suppressed (see phantom line KS3 in FIG. 51).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55 to FIG. 58, a displacement state when each movable unit (the slide unit 400, the projecting unit 700, and the elevating unit 800) is displaced into the combined state will be described. 55 to 58 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. 55 to 58 sequentially illustrate the displacement state when each movable unit is displaced into the combined state with FIG. 55 as the initial position.

  The operation of each movable unit arranged in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. In the present embodiment, the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation will be described in order from the initial position shown in FIG.

  In the first operation, the lifting base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is slid upward with respect to the base member 710. In the second operation, the protrusion unit 700 continues its operation from the first operation, the base members 434 and 435 of the slide unit 400 slide to the center of the gaming machine 10, and the rotating members 435 and 455 are about 45 degrees. As a result of the rotational displacement, the lifting member 820 of the lifting unit 800 is slid downward. In the third operation, the projecting member 835 of the projecting unit 800 is slid upward and the tip of the swinging member 832 is rotationally displaced downward.

  First, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the first operation is performed by the projecting unit 700 slidingly moving the elevating base 720 relative to the base member 710. Thereby, the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700 are displaced upward. In addition, since the detailed description of the displacement of the raising / lowering base 720 is as above-mentioned, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the second operation is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the lifting unit 800. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 450 (base members 434 and 454) are set to be the same.

  The second operation is performed in the middle of displacement of the lifting base 720 of the protruding unit 700 with respect to the base member 710. Therefore, the end timing of the displacement operation in which the lifting base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is displaced with respect to the base member 710 can be made substantially the same as the end timing of the displacement operations of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the lifting member 720.

  As described above, as the slide members 430 and 450 are slid and displaced, the rotation members 435 and 455 are rotationally displaced. Therefore, the rotation angles of the rotation members 435 and 455 are set to the center position of the game board 13. It is rotationally displaced at a symmetrical angle across (FIG. 57 center position in the left-right direction).

  Here, a first member and a second member that are formed so as to be linearly displaceable between a retracted position and a combined (extended) position are provided, and the first member and the second member are respectively displaced to the combined position. There is a gaming machine in which the first member and the second member are associated (integrated) with each other by being brought close to or in contact with each other so that the player can visually recognize the character as one character.

  In this case, in order to enhance the effect, it is effective that a larger character can be formed when the first member and the second member are displaced to the extended position. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the first member and the second member in a large size.

  However, if the first member and the second member have a structure in which the first member and the second member are displaced to the combined (extension) position by linear displacement, respectively, when the first member and the second member are enlarged, the first member and the second member are moved to the combined position. May interfere. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member cannot be performed at the same time, and it is necessary to shift the respective displacements, so that it takes time and extends until the character is formed. The production effect is hindered.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lifting base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is linearly displaced up and down with respect to the base member 710, so that it is disposed at the combined position and the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400. Since 455 is rotationally displaced from the retracted position and disposed at the combined position, the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 disposed on the lifting base 720 interfere with each other during the displacement to the combined position. This can be suppressed. Therefore, since the displacement of the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 can be performed simultaneously, the time until the character is formed is shortened and the effect is enhanced. be able to.

  The displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is a rotation locus that does not intersect with the displacement locus of the lifting base 720 that is linearly displaced, and the end position of the rotation locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is the displacement of the lifting base 720. It is set at a position adjacent to the end position of the trajectory. That is, with respect to the linear displacement locus of the lifting base 720, the rotation locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is a rotation locus having at least a displacement component in the displacement direction of the lifting base 720. ) The displacement component in the displacement direction of the elevating base 720 is set to decrease as the position is displaced.

  Thereby, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be a displacement locus that turns around from the outside with respect to the displacement locus of the lifting base 720. Therefore, by rotating and displacing the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is changed to a displacement locus that avoids the displacement locus of the elevation base 720 of the protruding unit 700 that performs linear displacement of elevation. be able to. Therefore, even if the displacement timings of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the elevating base 720 are shifted, the mutual trajectories do not intersect with each other, so that the mutual interference of the members can be suppressed. As a result, since the displacement of the lifting base 720 of the protruding unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 can be performed simultaneously, the time until the pattern (character) is formed can be shortened. The production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, the displacement trajectory of the rotating members 435 and 455 becomes a displacement trajectory that wraps around from the outside with respect to the displacement trajectory of the lifting base 720, so that the outer shape in the direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the lifting base 720 of the slide unit 700 that undergoes linear displacement. Even if it is increased, it is possible to easily suppress interference with the rotating members 435 and 455. Therefore, the raising / lowering base 720 can be enlarged.

  As described above, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are disposed on the base members 434 and 454 that are slidable. That is, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a state in which the rotational displacement and the linear displacement are combined, and are displaced to the combined (extension) position. Therefore, it is possible to easily form a curved locus on the rotating members 435 and 455. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 from interfering with the rotating member 730 during the displacement to the combined position.

  That is, the rotating members 435 and 455 can rotate in relation to the projecting unit 700 while moving to the combined (extension) position due to the linear displacement of the base members 434 and 454, so that the rotation is moved to the combined position. It can be used as a displacement for avoiding interference with the protruding unit 700 instead of movement, and as a result, mutual interference can be easily suppressed.

  Here, when the rotational members 435 and 455 are merely rotationally displaced, the position of the rotational shaft is fixed, and therefore the rotational shaft of the rotational members 435 and 455 is set at the end of the rotational members 435 and 455. In this case, when the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated, only the end portion opposite to the rotating shaft is rotationally displaced, so that it is difficult to set the displacement distance of the elevating base 720 large. Further, when the rotation shaft of the rotation members 435 and 455 is set at the center of the rotation members 435 and 455, the tip of the rotation member collides with the rear case 300 when the rotation member is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position. It is difficult to arrange the rotating member at the retracted position.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation shafts of the rotation members 435 and 455 are formed at the center positions of the rotation members 435 and 455, and the rotation shafts are slidably displaced to the base members 434 and 454. Since they are connected, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be combined with linear displacement and rotational displacement. Therefore, when rotating the rotating members 435 and 455, by adding a linear displacement, it is possible to prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 disposed at the retracted position from colliding with the rear case 300 while being rotated, The displacement distance can be set large.

  Further, since the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a manner in which the rotational displacement and the linear displacement are combined, the posture at the retracted position of the rotating members 435 and 455 is the posture at the combined position. Can be defined independently. That is, when the rotating members 435 and 455 are only rotated and displaced at the retracted position and the combined position, the posture of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position is defined by the rotation angle from the protruding position. Since the rotary members 435 and 455 combine rotational displacement and linear displacement, the posture at the retracted position can be defined independently of the posture at the combined position by the amount that can be linearly displaced. Therefore, the freedom degree of the attitude | position of the rotating members 435 and 455 in a retracted position can be raised.

  In other words, the rotating members 435 and 455 have their longitudinal directions parallel to the longitudinal direction of the retracting space at the retracted position at the retracted position (the position where the base members 434 and 454 are disposed outside). On the other hand, at the united position (the position where the base members 434 and 454 are displaced to the center), it is rotated to be in the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the freedom degree of the attitude | position of the rotating members 435 and 455 in a retracted position can be raised, and it can project by the center part of the game board 13 in a united position.

  Furthermore, since the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 formed in a horizontally long rectangle is arrange | positioned in the center part of the gaming machine 10 (motion unit 200) here, as the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is enlarged. The space on the left and right sides becomes smaller. Therefore, in the configuration in which the rotating members 435 and 455 are formed in a horizontally long shape and arranged in a horizontally long posture at the combined (overhanging) position to form a character together with the protruding unit 700, a large character cannot be formed. The production effect cannot be fully demonstrated. That is, the game area is formed vertically long, while the 3rd symbol display device 81 is formed horizontally long, so that one side and the other side of the 3rd symbol display device in the width direction of the game area are relatively narrow. It is difficult to secure a space for arranging the members. Therefore, in order to prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 from protruding into the display area of the third symbol display device 81 at the retracted position, it is necessary to form the second member in a small size.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 are disposed in a horizontally long posture at the combined (extended) position, while being disposed in a vertically long posture at the retracted position. By effectively utilizing the arrangement space of the members on one side or the other side of the third symbol display device 81, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be enlarged correspondingly, and as a result, they are formed together with the protruding unit 700 at the combined position. The pattern (character) can be made larger.

  That is, the retreat space where the rotating members 435 and 455 retreat is reduced to secure the space of the central portion of the gaming machine 10 (the third symbol display device 81), and at the combined position, to the central portion of the gaming machine 10 Can be secured. Therefore, the pattern (character) formed by the rotating members 435 and 455 and the protruding unit 700 can be enlarged.

  Further, as described above, the rotating members 435 and 455 are connected to the base members 434 and 454 so as to be capable of rotational displacement, and the rotational displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the linear displacement of the base members 434 and 454 are synchronized. Therefore, the relative positional accuracy of the rotating member with respect to the protruding unit 700 can be improved. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 from interfering with the protruding unit 700 in the middle of the displacement to the protruding position.

  Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the rotating members 435 and 455, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be formed in a large size, and together with the protruding unit 700 at the combined (extension) position. Characters to be formed can be made larger. For example, even if it is a relatively narrow region where it is difficult to secure a space for disposing a member, such as one side and the other side of the third symbol display device 81 in the width direction of the game region, the rotating member 435 , 455 can be set in a large size while the retracting position of 455 is set.

  Further, the protruding unit 700 includes a swing member 732 on the rotating member 730. In the second operation, the swinging member 732 is displaced upward with respect to the rotating member 730, so that it can be brought into contact with the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 close to each other. Therefore, the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped by contact with the swing member 732. In this case, since the tip of the swing member 732 is displaced upward, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be reliably brought into contact with the swing member 732. A detailed description of the contact of the swinging member 732 with the rotating members 435 and 455 will be described later.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the third operation is performed by displacing the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700. That is, only the displacement of the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 is performed at the end of the operation of each movable unit (the slide unit 400, the projecting unit 700, and the elevating unit 800). As described above, the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 can displace the swinging member 732 along with the displacement.

  Therefore, by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700, the tip of the projecting member 735 is displaced to the back side of the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800. Therefore, since the protruding unit 700 and the lifting / lowering unit 800 are connected, the player can visually recognize the state in which the movable units are integrated (in a combined state) and can be provided with interest by the displacement of the accessory.

  Further, since the swinging member 732 can be displaced downward in accordance with the displacement of the projecting member 735, between the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide members 430 and 450 in the slide unit 400 and the swinging member 732. The gap (space) can be made larger than that in the second operation.

  Thereby, when the rotating members 435 and 455 (sliding members 430 and 450) are in the combined state, a displaceable space can be secured. As a result, in the operation unit 200 in the combined state, the rotation members 435 and 455 (sliding members 430 and 450) can be displaced further, and the variation of the displacement state in the combined state of the operation unit 200 can be increased. .

  That is, when the raising / lowering base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is displaced to the extended position, the swinging member 732 is separated from the rotating member 730, and the role of receiving the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 is exhibited. Can displace the swinging member 732 in the direction approaching the rotating member 730, and can use the space formed by the displacement as the displacement space of the rotating members 435 and 455. Can be increased.

  Here, an example of a pattern (character) formed by combining the operation units (the slide unit 400, the protruding unit 700, and the elevating unit 800) is shown. For example, when the members (rotating members 435 and 455, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730), elevating member 820) of each operation unit are combined, a shape imitating a bow and an arrow is formed. In this case, the rotary members 435 and 455 are shaped like a bow, and the rotary members 435 and 455 are operated using the gap between the swinging member 732 and the rotary members 435 and 455 described above. A state where the arrow is not pulled or a state where the arrow is released from the bow is released. The rotating members 435 and 455 are part of both ends of the bow portion, and the elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) is a part of the rear end side (opposite side of the arrowhead) of the arrow, and the elevating member 820. Is the center of the bow, and the decorative member 820 of the lifting unit 800 is a part of the tip side (arrowhead side) of the arrow.

  Next, a case where the stop position of the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 is shifted in the excess direction will be described with reference to FIG. 59A and 59B are front views of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700. FIG. FIGS. 59A and 59B show a transition state when the left rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732 collide with each other when the stop position of the left slide member 430 is shifted in the excess direction.

  59A and 59B, only the case where the left rotation member 435 collides with the swing member 732 will be described, and when the right rotation member 455 collides with the swing member 732, the left rotation member will be described. 435 is considered to be the same as the case where the operation unit 200 is disposed symmetrically about the center position in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 6), and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400 in the combined state are not properly controlled as shown in FIG. 59 (a) due to poor control, rattling of each member, or error in sensor mounting position. There is a possibility that the side surfaces of the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swing member 732 of the projecting unit 700 without being stopped at the stop position in the combined state. Therefore, the swinging member 732 and the rotating members 435 and 455 may collide with each other and the parts may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the rotating member 730 on which the swing member 732 is disposed is disposed so as to be rotatable with respect to the lifting base 720, and therefore, as shown in FIG. As described above, by rotating the rotating member 730 relative to the lifting base 720, it is possible to mitigate an impact when the rotating member 435 collides with the swinging member 732. Therefore, it can suppress that the rocking | swiveling member 732 and each rotating member 435,455 are damaged.

  That is, the rotation member 730 of the protrusion unit 700 rotates with respect to the lifting base 720, thereby not only increasing the variation of the displacement state of the protrusion unit 700 but also causing the left rotation member 435 and the swing member 732 to collide. Damage can be suppressed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 59B, when the side surface of the left rotation member 435 collides with the swing member 732 of the protruding unit 700 and the rotation member 730 is rotationally displaced with respect to the lifting base 720, The swinging member 732 colliding with the rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732 disposed in a pair rotate to contact the rotating member 455 of the right slide member 450.

  Therefore, after the rotating member 730 is rotated to mitigate the impact of the collision between the rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732, a driving force that the rotating member 435 further rotates is applied to the rotating member 455 of the right slide member 450. be able to. Accordingly, it is possible to restrict the rotating member 730 from being further rotated.

  That is, two sets of the swing member 732 and the rotation member 435 (rotation member 455) are formed on the left and right, and when the rotation member 435 (rotation member 455) contacts the swing member 732 in one set, With the contact, the swinging member 732 is formed so as to be displaced to the rotating member 455 (the rotating member 435) in the other set. For example, in one set, the rotating member 435 (the rotating member 455) is When it is displaced beyond the reference position and is brought into contact with the swinging member 732, the swinging member 732 is directed toward the rotating member 455 (the rotating member 435) in the other set along with the contact. Can be displaced. Therefore, in the other set, the swinging member 732 is brought into contact with the rotating member 455 (the rotating member 435), whereby the rotating member 435 (the rotating member 455) is brought into contact with the swinging member 732 in the one set. The impact can be received not only by the swing member 732 (rotating member 730) but also by the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set. Thereby, kinetic energy can be disperse | distributed, and it can make it easy to stop the displacement of the rotation member 435 (rotation member 455) in one group, and can suppress the failure | damage of each member.

  Further, in this case, the swinging member 732 collides with the side surface of the portion on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 07 (b)) than the rotation axis of the rotating member 455 (the rotating member 435). When contacting the member 435), a driving force can be applied in a direction opposite to the rotational moment acting around the rotation axis of the rotating member 455 (the rotating member 435), so the rotating member 455 (the rotating member 435). ), The rotation of the rotating member 730 can be restricted. Therefore, since it is not necessary to supply electric power for restricting the rotation of the rotating member 730, the driving energy can be suppressed.

  Next, a case where the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400 are shifted in the excess direction will be described with reference to FIG. 60A and 60B are front views of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700. FIG. FIGS. 60A and 60B show a transition state when the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732 because the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 are shifted.

  Here, when the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 are shifted in the excess direction, the swing member 732 and the rotary members 435 and 455 collide with each other, and the swing member 732 or the rotary members 435 and 455 are collided. There was a risk of damage.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the swinging member 732 is displaced downward by performing the third operation described above at the end timing of the second operation (end timing of the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455). Therefore, when the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swing member 732, the swing member 732 can be displaced downward to mitigate the impact of the collision. As a result, it is possible to prevent the swinging member 732 or the rotating members 435 and 455 from being damaged.

  Further, in this case, since the impact when the swinging member 732 collides with each of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be used as a driving force for causing the protruding member 735 to protrude, the drive motor 763 for driving the protruding member 735 can be used. The load can be reduced. That is, the impact when the swinging member 732 collides with each of the rotating members 435 and 455 is transmitted to the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 through the sliding wall 733c, so that the drive body 761 (see FIG. 40). Can act in the direction of rotation. As a result, the load of the drive motor 763 that drives the protruding member 735 can be reduced.

  The third operation may be performed after a predetermined time after the second operation is completed. In this case, when the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 are shifted in the excess direction and the swing member 732 collides with the rotary members 435 and 455, the drive for displacing the swing member 732 and the protruding member 735 is performed. The rotational resistance of the motor 763 can easily stop the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 while displacing the swing member 732.

  Furthermore, since the load of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be applied in the rotational direction of the drive motor 763, the drive energy when driving the drive motor 763 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the displacement of each rotating member 435, 455 in the third operation will be described. 61A and 61B are front views of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700 in the third operation. FIG. 61B shows a state in which the rotating members 435 and 455 in the third operation are displaced.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the gap between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating member 730 of the slide unit 400 in the third operation causes the rotation member 730 to move when the third operation is displaced. The swing member 732 is enlarged by being displaced downward (downward in FIG. 61 (a)) along with the displacement of the protruding member 735. Therefore, the rotating members 435 and 455 in the third operation can be displaced further than in the second operation.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the base members 434, 454 of the left and right slide members 430, 450 are further slid to the center of the gaming machine 10, thereby rotating the rotating members 435, 455, It can be displaced to the center of the gaming machine 10. Thereby, a sense of unity can be further provided in the united (extended) state of the elevating member 820 and the rotating members 435 and 455 visually recognized by the player.

  Next, the second united state of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 68.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64, the displacement of the operation unit 200 to the second combined state will be described. 62 to 64 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. 62 to 64 illustrate transition states in which each movable unit of the operation unit 200 protrudes to the position of the second combined state. 62 shows the operating unit 200 in the retracted (initial) position, FIG. 64 shows the operating unit 200 in the second combined position, and FIG. 63 shows the operating unit 200 in the intermediate position between the retracted position and the second combined position. Are illustrated respectively.

  Furthermore, each member (rotating members 435 and 455) and elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) of each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and elevating unit 800) of the operation unit 200 described with reference to FIGS. ) And the lifting / lowering member 820) in the combined (extended) position will be described below as a first combined state. In the first combined state, the movable units of the first movable unit group (the slide unit 400, the protruding unit 700, and the lifting unit 800) are associated (integrated) with one pattern as the first effect mode. The player can be recognized.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in a state where the operation unit 200 is disposed at the retracted position, the slide unit 400 is in the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. 17A), and the upper unit 500 is in the retracted position (FIG. 22A ), The lower unit 600 is placed in the retracted position (position shown in FIG. 27A). 62, the base unit 434 of the slide unit 400 is first slid to the center of the game board 13 from the state shown in FIG. 62, and the upper displacement member 530 of the upper unit 500 is moved. The state shown in FIG. 63 is formed by the downward displacement and the downward displacement member 640 of the lower unit 600 being displaced upward. Next, the slide unit 400 is in the extended position (position shown in FIG. 18A), the upper combined unit 500 is in the extended position (position shown in FIG. 22A), and the lower combined unit 600 is in the extended position (position shown in FIG. 22A). By being displaced to the position shown in FIG. 27C, the second combined state shown in FIG. 64 is obtained.

  In the second combined state, the movable units of the second movable unit group (the slide unit 400, the upper combined unit 500, and the lower combined unit 600) are associated (integrated) with one pattern as the second effect mode. The player can be recognized. Note that the pattern (character) formed in the second rendering mode is, for example, a pattern (character) simulating Pegasus (a fantasy creature with wings on a horse's body). In this case, the part that forms the body part of the Pegasus is the lower unit 600, the part that forms the Pegasus head is the upper unit 500, and the part that forms the Pegasus wing is the slide unit 400.

  In the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 in the second combined state, the base member 434 disposed so as to be slidable is displaced to the extended position of the slide end position (position shown in FIG. 18A). That is, the base member 434 in the first combined state and the base member 434 in the second combined state are arranged with different distances for sliding displacement from the retracted position. Moreover, since the rotation member 435 is connected with the base member 434, the position where the rotation member 435 is arrange | positioned can be varied by a 1st union state and a 2nd union state.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the rotational displacement of the rotating member 435 is interlocked (synchronized) with the sliding displacement of the base member 434, the base member 434 is moved from the retracted position in the first combined state and the second combined state. The rotation angle (posture) of the rotating member 435 is arranged differently by the amount of slide displacement. In the present embodiment, the rotation angle (posture) of the rotating member 435 is arranged in a posture that differs by about 180 degrees around the rotation axis in the first combined state and the second combined state.

  As described above, the operation unit 200 is a tension member for each of the operation units (the slide unit 400, the protruding unit 700, and the elevating unit 800) (the rotating members 435 and 455, the elevating base 720 (the rotating member 730), and the elevating member 820). Due to the displacement to the exit position, the members can be combined to form one pattern (character).

  That is, the motion unit 200 only forms a single pattern (character) by combining the members with the central space of the motion unit 200 (the space in front of the third symbol display device 81) as the first effect mode. Instead, as the second effect mode, the members can be combined in the central space of the operation unit 200 to form a pattern different from the first effect mode.

  Therefore, since different patterns can be formed in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the player can visually recognize each of the first effect mode and the second effect mode depending on the effect and time. Can be made. Therefore, since the variation of the production can be increased, it is possible to show the player various entertainments and give interest.

  Here, the first movable unit group including a plurality of movable units formed to be displaceable between the retracted position and the combined (extended) position, and formed to be displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position. A gaming machine including a second movable unit group including a plurality of movable units is known.

  According to this gaming machine, when the movable units of the first movable unit group are arranged at the extended position, the movable units of the first movable unit group are associated (integrated) with one pattern ( Character) as the first effect mode, while each movable unit of the second movable unit group is arranged at the extended position, the movable units of the second movable unit group are associated with each other. An effect of allowing the player to recognize another pattern (character) as the second effect mode (integrated) is performed. In other words, in the first production mode, each movable unit of the second movable unit group is retracted to the retracted position, while each movable unit of the first movable unit group is disposed at the extended position, so that the first A first pattern (character) is formed in the game area by each movable unit group of the movable unit group, and in the second gaming state, the first movable unit is retreated to the retreat position, while the second movable unit By arranging each movable unit of the group at the overhang position, an effect of forming the second character in the game area by each movable unit of the second movable unit group is performed.

  In this case, in order to enhance the effect, it is effective that a larger pattern (character) can be formed. For that purpose, it is necessary to form each movable unit of the first movable unit group and each movable unit of the second movable unit group in a large size.

  However, when a plurality of characters (directions) are formed as in the conventional technique described above, the total number of movable units required to form a plurality of characters is increased accordingly, and each movable unit is retracted. Since the area (space) to be kept is limited, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the size of each movable unit. Therefore, it is difficult to enlarge each character (direction mode).

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, one movable unit of the first movable unit group (slide unit 400, protruding unit 700, and lifting unit 800) and the second movable unit group (slide unit 400, upper combined). Since one movable unit of the movable unit of the unit 500 and the lower unit 600) is also used, the movable unit necessary for forming a plurality of (first and second) production modes is accordingly provided. The total number can be reduced, and each movable unit can be enlarged. As a result, each pattern (character) can be enlarged.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, a part of the pattern (character) that the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 makes the player visually recognize as the first effect mode and the pattern (character) that the player visually recognizes as the second effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of movable units for forming the first effect mode or the second effect mode. Therefore, a space is created in the retreat space at the inner edge of the back case 300 (a space other than the central space in the retracted state (the space in front of the third symbol display device 81) shown in FIG. 62). The unit 400, the upper unit 500, the lower unit 600, the protruding unit 700, and the lifting unit 800) can be increased in size.

  Further, each member (rotating members 435 and 455, upper displacement member 530, lower displacement member 640, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) and elevating member 820) of each movable unit can be increased in size, so that the first The pattern (character) formed by the production mode and the second production mode can be enlarged.

  Here, as described above, the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 has a part of the pattern (character) to be visually recognized by the player as the first effect mode and the pattern (character) to be visually recognized by the player as the second effect mode. When the first effect mode and the second effect mode are arranged at the same position, both the first effect mode and the second effect mode are movable in common. It becomes easy for a player to visually recognize that the member of the unit (rotating member 435) is used, and the interest is hindered.

  Moreover, if it is necessary to form the first production mode and the second production mode using the members (rotating members 435) arranged at the same position, the degree of freedom decreases accordingly, It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape or arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 has a united (extension) position arranged when forming the first effect mode and a united (extension) arranged when forming the second effect mode. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode. This can be suppressed.

  In other words, since the position where the rotation member 435 is arranged is different between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, a pattern (character) formed between the first effect mode and the second effect mode. In addition, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is also used. Therefore, it can suppress that a player's interest is inhibited.

  In addition, the degree of freedom can be increased by the amount that the rotating member 435 can be arranged at different positions (extension positions) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode. The difference (shape and arrangement position) can be easily formed.

  Here, when the rotating member 435 is disposed in the same posture in the first combined state and the second combined state, the rotating member 435 is also used in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. This makes it easier for players to see and hinders interest. Moreover, if it is necessary to form the 1st production | presentation aspect and the 2nd production | presentation aspect respectively using the rotation member 435 of the same attitude, the degree of freedom will correspondingly fall, It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape or arrangement position) from the second effect mode.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation member 435 has a different posture between the posture when forming the first performance mode and the posture when forming the second performance mode. It can be made difficult for the player to recognize that the member 435 is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the entertainment can be prevented from being inhibited. Moreover, it is possible to easily form a difference (shape and arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

  Therefore, as described above, the rotating member 435 has different positions in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and has different positions (rotation angles). It can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize that the first effect mode and the second effect mode are combined, and the entertainment can be prevented from being inhibited.

  In other words, the rotating member 435 that is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode has a state in which either one of the positions or the postures arranged in the first effect mode and the second effect mode is different. However, there is a possibility that the player can recognize that the rotating member 435 is also used in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. Since the mode and the second performance mode are different from each other in the arrangement position and the posture, the player knows that the rotating member 435 is also used in the first combined state and the second combined state. Can be difficult to see.

  In addition, the rotating member 435 is rotatably disposed on the base member 434 that is linearly displaced, so that the rotating member 435 is displaced in a manner in which the rotational displacement and the linear displacement are combined. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the overhang position and the posture (rotation angle) when forming the first effect mode or the second effect mode can be increased.

  Furthermore, since the rotating member 435 is interlocked (synchronized) with the slide displacement of the base member 434 as described above, the relative positional accuracy (posture) of the rotating member 435 with respect to the base member 434 can be improved. Therefore, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are associated (integrated), and the player can be recognized as a predetermined pattern (character) as a whole.

  Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the rotation member 435, the rotation member 345 can be formed in a larger size, and the pattern (character) formed in the second effect mode can be increased in size. Can be For example, even if there is a relatively narrow area such as one side and the other side of the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the width direction of the game area, it is difficult to secure a member arrangement space. The rotating member 435 can be formed in a large size while setting the position of the retracted state 435.

  In this case, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are arranged in a region where the striking rotation member 435 of the base member 434 overlaps in the front view at the retracted position. The dimension in the front-rear direction of the area where no is disposed can be reduced. Therefore, when the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 are linearly displaced, the lower displacement member 640 can be prevented from coming into contact with the side surface of the base member 434.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68, the displacement mode of the operation unit 200 forming the second combined state will be described in detail. 65 (a) to 66 (b) are front views of the slide unit 400, the upper combined unit 500, and the lower combined unit 600. FIG. FIG. 67A is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper unit 500, and the lower unit 600 seen in the direction of the arrow LXVIIa in FIG. 65A, and FIG. 67B is a diagram of FIG. It is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper uniting unit 500, and the lower uniting unit 600 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIIb. FIG. 68A is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper unit 500, and the lower unit 600 seen in the direction of the arrow LXVIIIa in FIG. 66A, and FIG. 68B is a diagram of FIG. 66B. It is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper uniting unit 500, and the lower uniting unit 600 in the direction of the arrow LXVIIIb.

  In addition, FIG. 65A to FIG. 66B sequentially show the displacement mode from the retracted state to the second combined state. FIG. 65A shows the slide unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 65B shows the slide unit 400 in the first state, and FIG. 66A shows the slide unit 400 in the second state. Each of the slide units 400 in the retracted state is illustrated.

  Also, the displacement from the first state shown in FIG. 65A to the first state shown in FIG. 65B is performed by sliding the base member 434 of the slide unit 400. That is, in the initial displacement operation from the retracted position to the second combined state, the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 are stopped, and the slide unit 400 is displaced to the first state.

  66 (a) shows the slide unit 400, the upper uniting unit 500, and the lower uniting unit 600 at an intermediate position of displacement from the first state shown in FIG. 65 (b) to the second united state shown in FIG. 66 (b). It is a front view. In the transition to the second state shown in FIG. 66A, the upper unit 500 and the lower unit 600 are displaced while the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 is continued from the first state. Is done. That is, the transition from the first state to the second state is performed by displacing the slide unit 400, the upper uniting unit 500, and the lower uniting unit 600 that form the pattern (character) of the second effect mode. Further, the transition from the second state to the second combined state is performed by continuing the displacement operation from the first state to the second state.

  Further, in FIGS. 65 to 68, the base member 510 of the upper uniting unit 500, the base member 610 of the lower uniting unit 600, and the rotating member 536 of the slide unit 400 are shown by chain lines for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 67 (a), the upper unit 500 has the upper displacement member 530 accommodated in the base member 510 in the retracted state (the state where it is disposed at the retracted position). The lower unit 600 is disposed at a position where the lower displacement member 640 overlaps the lower base member 610 in the front-rear direction. Further, in the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400, a part of the base member 434 is disposed on the back side of the lower displacement member 640, and the rotation member 435 is disposed in front of the lower displacement member 640. That is, the lower displacement member 640 is disposed between the rotation member 435 and the base member 434 of the left slide member 430.

  As described above, the base member 434 of the left slide member 430 is formed of the front side base member 434b disposed on the front side and the back side base member 434a (see FIG. 13) disposed on the back side. A step portion 434b2 that is recessed toward the back side is formed on the lower side (lower side in FIG. 67B) of the shaft support hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b.

  The step portion 434b2 is a portion that forms a recess for suppressing interference between the base member 434 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower united unit 600, and the lower side of the step portion 434b2 of the base member 434 is entirely on the back surface. The gap between the rotating member 435 and the base member 434 can be increased by being recessed to the side.

  That is, since the lower side of the step 434b2 of the base member 434 is formed to be recessed on the back surface side, a gap between the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 can be increased, and the lower unit unit 600 is placed in the gap. A displacement member 640 can be provided.

  In addition, since the thickness in the front-rear direction on the lower side of the base member 434 is reduced, the gap between the facing member and the lower displacement member 640 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 from coming into contact with each other when the base member 434 is slid and displaced in a first state (the state shown in FIG. 65B) which will be described later.

  On the other hand, on the upper side of the step portion 434b2 of the base member 434, transmission gears 437a to 437f (see FIG. 13) serving as transmission means for transmitting drive to the rotating member 435 can be disposed by increasing the thickness in the front-rear direction. It is said.

  As described above, the base member 434 is in a state where the upper end side (upper side in FIG. 65) is connected and hangs down so as to be slidable with respect to the base member 410, and the lower end side (lower side in FIG. Since it is slidably inserted between facing the guide member 419 (see FIG. 6), a force is applied when the upper side of the base member 434 is slid in the left-right direction (FIG. 65 (a) left-right direction). Since the thickness in the front-rear direction above the base member 434 can be increased, the base member 434 can be prevented from being deformed.

  Further, at the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. 65A), the back side of the connecting arm 650 of the lower unit 600 is brought into contact with the plane between the step portion 434b2 and the shaft support hole 434b1. Therefore, the lower unit 600 in the retracted state can be prevented from falling in the front-rear direction.

  That is, in the lower unit 600, since the lower displacement member 640 is formed long in the vertical direction, the upper end portion is likely to fall down in the front-rear direction, and the connecting arm 650 and the base member 434 connected to the upper side of the lower displacement member 640 In this state, the upper end portion of the lower displacement member 640 can be prevented from falling in the front-rear direction, and the position of the lower unit 600 in the retracted position can be stabilized. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the base member 434 from coming into contact with the lower displacement member 640 when the base member 434 is slid to the first state.

  As shown in FIGS. 65B and 67B, when the left slide member 430 is displaced to the position of the first state, the rotation member 435 is rotationally displaced along with the displacement of the base member 434. As a result, when the base member 434 is displaced by a predetermined amount, the rotating member 435 is rotated so that the rotating member 435 and the lower unit 600 can be positioned so as not to overlap in the front-rear direction, and the base member 434 and the lower The united unit 600 can be positioned so as not to overlap in the front-rear direction.

  That is, when viewed from the front, the lower base member 610 does not overlap in the front-rear direction inside a region K2 (see FIG. 65B) surrounded by the base member 434, the rotating member 435, and the lower base member 610 of the lower unit 600. A portion of the lower displacement member 640 is disposed.

  As described above, since the lower displacement member 640 of the lower unit 600 is formed long in the vertical direction, the lower displacement member 640 can be disposed inside the region K2 where the upper end portion tends to tilt in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it can suppress that the lower displacement member 640 collides with the base member 434 and the rotation member 435.

  In the first state, the base member 434 displaces the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500 (rotational driving force) on the side away from the connecting shaft 531 (on the upper contact portion 533 side). It is arranged at a position overlapping with 530 in the front-rear direction. Thereby, when displacing to a 2nd state, it can suppress that the upper displacement member 530 of the upper uniting unit 500 collides with the rotating shaft 435a which connects the base member 434 and the rotating member 435.

  That is, when the slide unit 400 and the upper unit 500 are displaced from the retracted position at the same start time (timing), the upper displacement member 530 and the rotation shaft 435b of the rotation member 435 collide with each other. By delaying the start time for starting the downward displacement from the start time for the left slide member 430 to start the displacement, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper unit 500 can be prevented from colliding with the rotating shaft 435a.

  Further, the downward displacement of the upper displacement member 530 to the protruding position is started when the base member 434 is positioned on the back side of the upper displacement member 630. Thereby, when the upper displacement member 630 is displaced, collision with the side surface of the base member 434 can be suppressed.

  That is, since the upper displacement member 530 is connected to the base member 510 only at one end side, the other end side (upper contact portion 533 side) is easily displaced in the front-rear direction. Further, as described above, the upper displacement member 530 rotates downward and displaces as it slides and displaces in the left-right direction of the operation unit 200 (the central portion in the left-right direction in FIG. 66 (b)). Therefore, when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced in a state where the base member 434 is slid to the center side with respect to the upper displacement member 530, the other end side of the upper displacement member 530 is displaced to the back side from the front surface of the base member 434. When the base member 434 collides with the side surface of the base member 434, the upper displacement member 530 is displaced when the base member 434 is positioned on the back side of the upper displacement member 530. Colliding with the side surface of the member 434 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 66A and 68A, in the second state between the first state and the second combined state, the base member 434 of the left slide member 430 is further in the left-right direction than in the first state. The slide is displaced to the right (right side in FIG. 66 (a)). Therefore, the rotating member 435 that is rotationally displaced according to the slide displacement of the base member 434 is also rotationally displaced. Thereby, one end of the rotating member 435 located on the lower unit 600 unit side (left side in FIG. 65 (b)) with respect to the rotating shaft 435a can be rotated and positioned above the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, by sliding the base member 434, the width of the region K2 in the left-right direction (FIG. 66 (a) left-right direction) is increased, and by rotating the rotating member 435, the vertical direction of the region K2 (FIG. 66 ( a) The width in the vertical direction) can be increased.

  Thereby, when the lower displacement member 640 of the lower united unit 600 is displaced, it is possible to prevent the upper member of the lower displacement member 640 from colliding with the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 when tilted in the front-rear direction.

  Moreover, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper unit 500 is displaced while maintaining a state of overlapping with the base member 434 in the front-rear direction. That is, when the displacement from the first state to the second state is performed, the base member 434 can be placed on the back side of the upper displacement member 530, and as described above, the other end of the upper displacement member 530 ( It is possible to suppress the upper contact portion 533 side) from being displaced in the front-rear direction and colliding with the side surface of the base member 434.

  In other words, the upper displacement member 530 is disposed at a position overlapping the base member 434 when viewed from the front while being displaced from the first state to the second combined state, and thus is displaced to a position where the second combined state is formed. In the meantime, the upper displacement member 530 can be prevented from coming into contact with the side surface of the base member 434.

  Furthermore, since the protruding position of the upper displacement member 530 is installed between the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 facing each other, the rotating member 435 is positioned on the front side so that the player can easily see the upper member. By linking (integrating) the displacement member 530 and the rotation member 435, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the whole as a predetermined pattern (character).

  66 (b) and 68 (b), in the second combined state, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500 and the lower contact portion 643 of the lower combined unit 600 are in contact with each other. In addition, a part of the rotating member 435 is placed on the front side of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower unit 600 (left side in FIG. 68B).

  Thereby, the rotation member 435, the upper displacement member 530, and the lower displacement member 640 can be disposed at close positions so that the player can visually recognize them as one pattern (character).

  Here, the rotation member 435 has different overhang positions and different postures (rotation angles) in the first production mode and the second production mode, and needs to form a plurality of stop states. The structure becomes complicated, and accordingly, the stop state (arrangement position and posture) tends to vary. Therefore, when the rotation member 435 of the slide unit 400 contacts the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower unit 600 when forming the second effect mode, If the arrangement position or posture does not reach the target position, a gap is formed between the upper unit 500 and the lower unit 600. On the other hand, if the rotation member 435 exceeds the target position, the upper unit The unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 are pushed out to cause a positional shift. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the relationship between the upper unit 500 and the lower unit 600 in the united state.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the rotating member 435 has the movable units (the slide unit 400, the upper uniting unit 500, the lower uniting unit 600, and the projecting unit 700) in the first stage and the second stage. , The movable unit (upper displacement member 530, lower displacement member 640, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730), elevating member 820) of the elevating unit 800) are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction and each movable unit in front view Since it overlaps with a part of the movable member, even when there is a variation in the stopped state (overhanging or posture) in the first production mode and the second production mode, the relationship with each movable member of each movable unit It is easy to maintain sex. That is, by overlapping partly in front view, even when the displacement of the rotating member 435 is insufficient, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap with each movable member of each movable unit, and the position in the front-rear direction can be reduced. By being different, even when the displacement of the rotating member 435 becomes excessive, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the movable members of the movable units caused by being pushed out. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the relevance of each movable unit to each movable member in the combined state.

  In the second effect mode, the upper contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640 are disposed in contact with each other, and the rotation member 435 is disposed in front thereof. By associating (integrating) the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotation member 435, a pattern (character) formed in the second combined state can be easily recognized by the player.

  That is, in the second effect mode, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be in the same position in the front-rear direction, so that the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the combined (projected) state are Since it can be integrated and made easy for the player to visually recognize, the pattern (character) formed in the second rendering mode can be easily recognized by the player.

  In this case, as described above, the rotating member 435 is likely to vary in the stopped state (arrangement position and posture). However, at the stop position when the rotating member 435 forms the second effect mode, the upper displacement member In the structure in contact with 530 and the lower displacement member 640, if the arrangement position or posture of the rotation member 435 does not reach the target position, a gap is formed between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 and associated (integrated). ) Is inhibited.

  Similarly, even if the arrangement position and orientation of the rotating member 435 exceed the target position, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are pushed out to cause positional displacement, and thus association (integration) is hindered. That is, in the second effect mode, since the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are in contact with each other, if the rotation member 435 is in contact with the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640, the rotation member When the arrangement position or orientation of 435 exceeds the target position, the upper displacement member 530 or the lower displacement member 640 is pushed out. In this case, since the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 that are in contact with each other are displaced, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are not displaced relative to the rotating member 435, Each member is displaced. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are brought into contact with each other at the combined (extended) position, the rotation member 435 is disposed in front of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640. Especially effective.

  Further, in this case, a part of the rotating member 435 is disposed on the front side of at least a part of a portion where the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640 are in contact. The contact portion between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the rotating member 435. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotation member 435 as one pattern. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing as a pattern (character) of the second effect mode and losing interest.

  Next, the slide unit 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73.

  First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 2400 in the second embodiment. 70 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 2400. FIG.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described. However, the left slide member 2430 and the right slide member in the second embodiment are described. 2450 is switched between a rotating state and a non-rotating state of the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 in accordance with the slide displacement. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the base member 2410 in the second embodiment mainly includes a main body base member 2480 and a rotation transmission member 2485 arranged to be rotatable with respect to the main body base member 2480. Composed.

  The main body base member 2480 is formed from a rectangular horizontally long plate-like body as viewed from the front, and a protruding plate portion 411 is erected on the front side of the game board at the lower edge. Further, the main body base member 2480 is formed with projecting portions 2481 on the lower surface sides of both end portions in the longitudinal direction.

  The protruding plate portion 411 is provided with a base-side rack gear 412 for imparting rotation to the first-side pinion gear 432 disposed on the first member 431 in accordance with the sliding displacement of the first member 431 on the upper surface side.

  The protrusions 2481 are formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480 as described above. The protruding portion 2481 has a circular bearing hole 2481a into which a shaft portion 2486 of a rotation transmitting member 2485 described later is inserted. In addition, a through hole 2481b is formed to penetrate in the left-right direction in the protrusion 2481 formed on one end side in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480 (the right side of the gaming machine).

  The bearing holes 2481a are recessed in both sides of the main body base member 2480 from the center in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480 to the outside, and the shaft centers formed at both ends are formed concentrically.

  The rotation transmission member 2485 is formed in a substantially rectangular cross section, and is formed in a prismatic shape set to a dimension slightly smaller than the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480. At both ends of the rotation transmitting member 2485, there are formed rotating portions 2487 that are formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from the side and have a predetermined thickness, and the shaft portion 2486 of the shaft-like body extends longitudinally outward from the axis of the rotating portion 2487. Projectingly formed.

  Further, on the lower surface side of the rotation transmission member 2485, a left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is engraved on the other end in the longitudinal direction (the left side of the game board), and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 is engraved on one side in the longitudinal direction (the right side of the game board). Established.

  The shaft portions 2486 formed at both ends of the rotation transmitting member 2485 are formed so that their axes are concentric. Further, as described above, the shaft portion 2486 is inserted inside the bearing hole 2481a formed in the protruding portion 2481, so that the diameter dimension of the shaft portion 2486 is formed smaller than the bearing hole 2481a.

  Thus, the rotation transmitting member 2485 can rotate around the axis of the shaft portion 2486 when the shaft portion 2486 is inserted into the bearing hole 2481a of the protruding portion 2481 and disposed in the main body base member 2480.

  A circular rack 2487a is engraved on the side surface of the rotating portion 2487 formed on one side (the right side of the game board) of the rotation transmitting member 2485. The rotation transmitting member 2485 is disposed on the main body base member 2480 in a state where the circular rack 2487a meshes with the pinion gear 2488 disposed on one side of the main body base member 2480 in the longitudinal direction (right side in front view).

  The pinion gear 2488 is a gear for transmitting the driving force of the rotation drive motor 2489 to the rotation transmission member 2485, and the shaft center is fastened to the rotation drive motor 2489. The rotation drive motor 2489 has its rotation shaft inserted through the through hole 2481b of the protrusion 2481, and the pinion gear 2488 is fastened from the opposite surface of the protrusion 2481.

  Therefore, by applying a rotational driving force to the rotational drive motor 2489, the pinion gear 2488 is rotated, and a driving force is applied to the circular rack 2487a formed in the rotating portion 2487 of the rotation transmitting member 2485. Thereby, the rotation transmission member 2485 can rotate around the shaft portion 2486.

  The left rotation transmission rack gear 413 meshes with a transmission gear 2437 a disposed on the left slide member 2430. The transmission gear 2437a meshes with the transmission gear 437b, and the driving force is transmitted to the plurality of transmission gears 437b to 437f by the rotation of the transmission gear 2437a. As a result, rotation of the rotating member 435 can be imparted with the sliding displacement of the left slide member 2430.

  The right rotation transmission rack gear 414 meshes with a transmission gear 2457a arranged on the right slide member 2450. The transmission gear 2457a meshes with the transmission gear 437b, and the transmission is transmitted to the plurality of transmission gears 457b to 457f by the rotation of the transmission gear 2457a. Thereby, a rotational driving force can be applied to the rotating member 455 in accordance with the sliding displacement of the right slide member 2450.

  Next, the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gear 2457a will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gear 2457a have the same shape, and thus detailed description of the transmission gear 2457a is omitted.

  71 (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 2437a, and FIG. 71 (b) is a side view of the transmission gear 2437a.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the transmission gear 2437 a includes a tooth portion 2437 a 1 having a constant tooth thickness and a bulging portion 2437 a 2 that gradually decreases as the tooth thickness goes toward the back surface side.

  The tooth portion 2437a1 is a portion that meshes with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b, and has a thickness dimension substantially the same as the thickness dimension (the dimension in the front-rear direction) of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b. It is formed.

  The bulging portion 2437a2 is a portion that bulges into a shape that gradually decreases toward the central portion of the tooth thickness as the tooth thickness increases toward the back side. The distance dimension at which the bulging part 2437a2 bulges from the tooth part 2437a1 to the back side is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the tooth part 2437a1 or smaller than the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the tooth part 2437a1. Thereby, it can suppress that the rigidity of the bulging part 2437a2 falls, and can suppress that the bulging part 2437a2 is damaged.

  Next, the operation of the rotation transmission member 2485 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. In the following, the left slide member 2430 will be described as a representative example, and description of the right slide member 2450 will be omitted.

  FIG. 72 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 2400 in a state where the rotation transmission member 2485 and the transmission gear 2437a are engaged with each other, and FIG. 72 (b) is a diagram illustrating the rotation transmission member 2485, the transmission gear 2437a, and the like. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit 2400 in the state by which the mesh | engagement was cancelled | released. 73 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 2400 along the line LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa in FIG. 72 (a), and FIG. 73 (b) is a diagram of the slide unit 2400 along the line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb in FIG. 72 (b). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram.

  In FIG. 72, a part of the rotation transmission member 2485 is shown by a broken line for easy understanding. Further, the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gears 437b to 437f are illustrated in a transparent state.

  As shown in FIGS. 72A and 73A, when the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the rotation transmission member 2485 is positioned below (downward in FIGS. 72 and 73), transmission to the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is performed. A state in which the gear 2437a is engaged is formed.

  Therefore, when the left slide member 2430 is displaced with respect to the base member 2410, the transmission gear 2437a meshed with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 rotates. Accordingly, the rotation driving force of the transmission gear 2437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, so that the rotating member 435 rotates.

  On the other hand, as described above, when a rotational driving force is applied to the rotational drive motor 2489 and the rotation transmission member 2485 is rotated upward on the back side, the engagement between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released. The

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 72 (b) and 73 (b), when the rotation transmission member 2485 rotates around the shaft portion 2486, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 formed on the rotation transmission member 2485 is rotated. Displaces upward along with the rotation. Accordingly, the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released.

  Therefore, even if the left slide member 2430 is slid with respect to the base member 2410, the engagement between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released, so the transmission gear 2437a does not rotate. As a result, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating member 435 from the transmission gears 437b to 437f, so that even if the left slide member 2430 is displaced, the rotating member 435 can be configured not to rotate.

  That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430 is converted into the rotational motion of the rotation member 435, and the first drive state in which the rotation member 435 is rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430, and the slide of the left slide member 2430 The displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435, the second driving state in which the left sliding member 2430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 435 is not rotating, and the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 2430 is stopped and rotated. A third driving state in which the rotation of the member 435 is continued by its inertial force can be formed.

  Thereby, since the number of combinations of the movement (linear movement and rotation movement) of the left slide member 2430 and the rotation member 435 can be increased, it is possible to enhance the effect.

  Here, it is also conceivable to arrange a drive motor for applying a driving force for rotating the rotating member 435 to the left slide member 2430. However, if a drive motor is disposed on the left slide member 2430, the weight of the left slide member 2430 increases, and the addition of the left drive motor 475 for driving (sliding) the left slide member 2430 increases. There was a point.

  On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, the second drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430 is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotary member 435 can be formed by the rotary drive motor 2489 disposed on the base member 2410. it can. That is, it is not necessary to provide the left slide member 2430 with drive means for driving the rotation member 435 to rotate, and accordingly, the load on the left drive motor 475 for driving the left slide member 2430 can be reduced accordingly. it can.

  Further, the rotation transmission member 2485 provided with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 that transmits the driving force to the transmission gear 2437a is rotated along the rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, thereby transmitting the left rotation transmission. When the meshing between the rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is to be released, the gears are not meshed when the second driving state in which the meshing is released is switched to the first driving state in which the meshing is not performed, and the side surfaces are in contact with each other. There is a problem that the counterclockwise transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a cannot be engaged with each other due to a collision.

  On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, since the bulging portion 2437a2 is formed in the transmission gear 2437a, the area of the side surface of the transmission gear 2437a can be reduced. Therefore, when switching from the second driving state in which the engagement is released to the first driving state in which the engagement is performed, it is easy to insert the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 between the tooth portion of the transmission gear 2437a. it can.

  Further, since the bulging portion 2437a2 is formed so that the tooth thickness is gradually decreased toward the back side of the transmission gear 2437a, the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is guided to the tooth portion 2437a1 along the gradually decreasing inclined surface. can do.

  That is, by forming the bulging portion 2437a2 in the transmission gear 2437a, it is possible to smoothly perform meshing when switching from the second driving state in which the meshing is released to the first driving state in which the meshing is performed.

  In addition, it is preferable that the axial part 2486 in 2nd Embodiment is formed in the plane of the front surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of a 1st drive state. Therefore, when the rotation transmission member 2485 rotates and switches from the first driving state to the second driving state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are prevented from being displaced toward the transmission gears 2437a and 2457a. it can. Therefore, the rotation transmission member 2485 can be smoothly switched from the first drive state to the second drive state.

  Next, a slide unit 3400 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. FIG. 74 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 3400 in the third embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described. However, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member in the third embodiment are described. 450 is switched between a rotating state and a non-rotating state of the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 in accordance with the slide displacement. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the base member 3410 in the third embodiment mainly includes a main body base member 3480 and a housing member 3490 arranged in front of the main body base member 3480.

  The main body base member 3480 is formed in a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a protruding plate portion 3411 is erected on the edge.

  On the lower side of the projecting plate portion 3411, a left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is engraved on the lower surface side on the lower surface side (the left side of the game board), and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 is engraved on one side in the longitudinal direction (the right side of the game board). Established. On the other hand, an insertion hole 3481c is formed in the upper surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 so as to penetrate in the vertical direction.

  The housing member 3490 is a member in which the first member 431 and the second member 433 of the left slide member 430 and the rack member 451 of the right slide member 450 are arranged, and is formed in a plate-like body having a rectangular shape in front view. At the same time, a protruding wall 3491 that protrudes from the edge to the front side of the gaming machine is formed, and the first member 431, the second member 433, and the rack member 451 are disposed on the inner peripheral surface of the protruding wall 3491.

  In addition, the housing member 3490 is formed so that the outer shape in front view is smaller than the shape of the inner peripheral surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480. Accordingly, the housing member 3490 can be disposed inside the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480.

  A base-side rack gear 412 is engraved on the inner surface of the lower protruding wall 3491 of the housing member 3490. On the other hand, a projecting wall 3491 on the upper side of the housing member 3490 is formed with a through hole 3491a penetrating in the vertical direction.

  The through hole 3491a is a hole for inserting a bolt (not shown) from the inside of the housing member 3490 to fasten a shaft portion of the telescopic cylinder 3495, which will be described later, and the housing member 3490, and the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 The diameter is formed to be smaller than the diameter.

  The cylinder 3495 is a member that slides the housing member 3490 up and down by its drive. By applying electric power, the shaft portion protruding from the inside of the cylinder 3495 is inserted into the cylinder 3495, and the shaft portion This is a member (solenoid) for displacing the protruding distance.

  The cylinder 3495 is fastened to the housing member 3490 in a state in which the shaft portion is inserted into the insertion hole 3481 c formed in the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480. The main body side of the cylinder 3495 is fastened and fixed to the protruding plate portion 3411a of the main body base member 3480.

  Therefore, when electric power is applied to the cylinder 3495, the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 is displaced up and down, and the housing member 3490 fastened to the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 can be displaced up and down. That is, the housing member 3490 can be displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the main body base member 3480.

  Next, the operation of the housing member 3490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. In the following, the left slide member 430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 450 will be omitted.

  FIG. 75A is a schematic view of the slide unit 3400 viewed from the front in a state where the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a of the main body base member 3480 are engaged with each other, and FIG. Is a schematic view of the slide unit 3400 as viewed from the front in a state in which the engagement between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a of the main body base member 3480 is released. 76A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 3400 taken along the line LXXVIa-LXXVIa in FIG. 75A, and FIG. 76B is a diagram of the slide unit 3400 taken along the line LXXVIb-LXXVIb in FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. In FIG. 75, a part of the housing member 3490 and a part of the main body base member 3480 are shown by broken lines for easy understanding. Further, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are illustrated in a see-through state.

  As shown in FIGS. 75 (a) and 76 (a), when the housing member 3490 is positioned upward, the distance dimension L1 between the bottom surface of the housing member 3490 and the inner surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is as follows. While being arranged in a sufficiently secured state, the counterclockwise transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a of the main body base member 3480 are engaged with each other.

  Therefore, when the left slide member 430 is slid relative to the base member 3410, the transmission gear 437a meshing with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 rotates. As a result, the driving force for rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, so that the rotating member 435 rotates.

  On the other hand, as described above, when the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 is displaced to protrude from the inside of the cylinder 3495, the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a is released.

  That is, in a state where the storage member 3490 is positioned below, the distance L2 between the bottom surface of the storage member 3490 and the inner surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is set to be smaller than the distance dimension L1. A state is formed in which the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a of the base member 3480 is released (distance dimension L1> L2).

  Therefore, even if the left slide member 430 is slid with respect to the base member 3410, the engagement between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a is released, so the transmission gear 437a does not rotate. As a result, since the driving force from the transmission gears 437b to 437f is not transmitted to the rotation member 435, even if the left slide member 430 is displaced, a form that does not rotate can be formed.

  That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is converted into the rotational motion of the rotation member 435, and the first drive state in which the rotation member 435 rotates in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 Is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member 435, the second driving state in which the left sliding member 430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating, and the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 is stopped. The third driving state in which the rotation of 435 is continued by the inertial force can be formed. Thereby, since the number of combinations of the movement (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left slide member 430 can be increased, the production effect can be enhanced accordingly.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the transmission gear 437a disposed on the left slide member 430 is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 formed on the main body base member 3480. The first driving state and the second driving state can be switched.

  Therefore, when switching from the second drive state to the first drive state, the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a can be performed smoothly.

  That is, in a state where the teeth of the transmission gear 437a and the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 are out of phase, it is necessary to match the phases. However, when the transmission gear 437a is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, when the transmission gear 437a is brought close to the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 with the phase shifted, the left rotation transmission rack gear Since the tooth surface of 413 and the tooth surface of the transmission gear 437a are in contact with each other and the transmission gear 437a meshes with the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a are engaged. It is not necessary to match the phases, and the meshing can be performed smoothly.

  Next, a slide unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. FIG. 77 is a front view of a base member 4410 in the fourth embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described. However, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member in the fourth embodiment are described. 450 is switched between a rotating state and a non-rotating state of the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 in accordance with the slide displacement. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the base member 4410 according to the fourth embodiment is formed of a horizontally long plate-like body when viewed from the front, and a protruding plate portion 411 is erected on the front side of the game board at the lower edge portion. . On the bottom surface side of the protruding plate portion 411, a left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 that applies a rotation driving force to the rotation member 435 and a right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 that applies a rotation driving force to the rotation member 455 are formed.

  The left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is formed on the left side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 4410. In addition, a notch 4413a having a tooth surface cut out is formed at both ends and the center of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413. Further, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch 4413a include a small tooth portion 4413b having a smaller outer shape than the teeth not adjacent to the notch 4413a.

  On the other hand, the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 is formed on the right side of the base member 4410 in the longitudinal direction. Further, at both ends of the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414, notch portions 4414a are formed by notching the tooth surfaces. Further, the teeth of the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the notch portion 4414a include a small tooth portion 4414b having a smaller outer shape than the teeth not adjacent to each other.

  Next, the operation of the slide unit 4400 will be described with reference to FIG. In the following, the left slide member 430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 450 will be omitted.

  78A is a schematic view of the slide unit 4400 in a state where the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a of the base member 4410 are engaged with each other, and FIG. 78B is a schematic view of the base member 4410. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide unit 4400 in the state which the engagement of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a was cancelled | released. In FIG. 78, a part of the base member 4410 is shown by a broken line for easy understanding. Further, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are illustrated in a see-through state.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (a), when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is positioned below the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 other than the notch 4413a, the transmission gear 437a rotates counterclockwise. A state of meshing with the transmission rack gear 4413 is formed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is positioned below the notch 4413a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the transmission gear 437a is The left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the disengaged state are formed.

  That is, the rotation member 435 can be rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 until the transmission gear 437a reaches the notch 4413a in which the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 are missing. . On the other hand, when the transmission gear 437a reaches the notch 4413a in which the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 are missing, the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped, so that the rotation of the rotation member 435 is reduced to its inertial force. Can be continued.

  Accordingly, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is converted into the rotational motion of the rotation member 435, and the first drive state in which the rotation member 435 rotates in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. Is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member 435, the second driving state in which the left sliding member 430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating, and the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 is stopped. The third driving state in which the rotation of 435 is continued by the inertial force can be formed. Thereby, since the number of combinations of the movement (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left slide member 430 can be increased, the production effect can be enhanced accordingly.

  Further, the switching between the first drive state and the third drive state is configured such that the disengagement between the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a is released by removing some teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413. Therefore, there is no need to dispose a drive motor or the like for releasing the engagement between the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a on the left slide member 430, so that the weight of the left slide member 430 can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 for slidably moving the left slide member 430 can be suppressed.

  Further, since the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is formed with a small tooth portion 4413b, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch portion 4413a are damaged when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state. And the durability of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 can be improved.

  That is, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch 4413a are easily damaged because the teeth of the transmission gear 437a that have passed through the notch 4413a collide.

  In this case, since the small tooth portion 4413b is formed in the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, when switching from the third driving state to the first driving state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a smoothly mesh. be able to.

  That is, in the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 without the small tooth portion 4413b, when the rotation phase with the transmission gear 437a is deviated when switching from the third driving state to the first driving state, the teeth of the transmission gear 437a There is a possibility that the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 are engaged with each other and cannot be engaged.

  In this case, when the rotation of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a is out of phase by forming the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch 4413a to have an outer shape smaller than the other teeth. However, it is possible to adjust the phase of the transmission gear 437a by rotating the transmission gear 437a while suppressing the meshing of the teeth when the small tooth portion 4413b and the transmission gear 437a come into contact with each other. As a result, the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a can be performed smoothly.

  Next, the left slide member 5430 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective front view of the left slide member 5430 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 80 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 5430. In the following, the left slide member 5430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the left slide member 5430 will be omitted.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described. However, the left slide member 5430 and the right slide member in the fifth embodiment are described. 5450 is switched between a rotating state and a non-rotating state of the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 in accordance with the slide displacement. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, in the left slide member 5430 according to the fifth embodiment, a one-way clutch 5439 is disposed on a rotation shaft 5435a of the rotation member 5435.

  The one-way clutch 5439 includes an outer ring 5439b connected to a shaft hole 5437f1 formed in a circular shape through the shaft center of the transmission gear 5437f, an inner ring 5439c connected to the rotation shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5435, and each cam surface of the inner ring 5439c. A plurality of rollers 5439d, a holder 5439e that holds each of the rollers 5439d, and a switching plate 5439a that is connected to the holder 5439e and switches the phase of the roller 5439d with respect to the cam surface. .

  The switching plate 5439a is formed with a sliding groove 5439a1 penetrating in the shape of a long hole, and a protruding portion 5436d protruding to the front side of a displacement member 5436 described later is inserted into the inner peripheral surface of the sliding groove 5439a1. .

  Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81A is a schematic view of the left slide member 5430 viewed from the front before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and FIG. 81B is a left view after the switching plate 5439a is operated. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the slide member 5430 from the front. In FIG. 81, for ease of understanding, the drawing is simplified, and a part of the one-way clutch 5439 and the displacement member 5436 is shown by broken lines.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (a), in a state where the displacement member 5436 is disposed on the back side of the rotating member 5435, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is disposed at the end of the cam surface, and the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. It is bitten by the wedge formed between. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is driven. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), when the displacement member 5436 is displaced with respect to the rotation member 5435, the position of the protrusion 5436 d formed on the displacement member 5436 is associated with the displacement. It is displaced with respect to. Thereby, the switching plate 5439a is switched.

  When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is disposed at the neutral position of the cam surface and is separated from the meshing space between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is brought into a neutral idling state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

  Therefore, by displacing the displacement member 5436 connected to the rotation member 5435, a state where the one-way clutch 5439 allows rotation transmission and a state where rotation transmission is blocked can be formed.

  That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430 is converted into the rotational motion of the rotation member 5435, and the first drive state in which the rotation member 5435 rotates with the displacement of the left slide member 5430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430 Is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, the second driving state in which the left sliding member 5430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 5435 is not rotated, and the one-way clutch when stopping the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 5430 By changing from the state in which 5439 allows the transmission of the rotation to the state in which the rotation is blocked, the third driving state in which the rotation of the rotation member 5435 is continued by the inertial force while the left slide member 5430 is stopped is formed. be able to.

  Therefore, the first drive state, the second drive state, and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of motions (linear motion and rotational motion) of the left slide member 5430 and the rotation member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, since the displacement of the displacement member 5436 can be combined with the movement of the left slide member 5430 and the rotation member 5435 (linear movement and rotation movement), the number of combinations can be increased. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  In this case, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is operated by the displaced displacement member 5436. Therefore, the displacement member 5436 can have both the role of performing the effect by the displacement and the role of operating the switching plate 5439a. That is, since it is not necessary to separately provide a drive motor or the like for operating the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 5430, the weight of the entire slide member can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 for driving the left slide member 5430 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85, the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment will be described.

  First, the overall configuration of the left slide member 6430 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 6430 according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 6430. In the following, the left slide member 6430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 6450 will be omitted.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described. However, the left slide member 6430 and the right slide member in the sixth embodiment are described. The 6450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated and a non-rotating state in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left slide member 6430 and the right slide member 6450 by switching the one-way clutch 5439. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment is disposed on the rotation shaft 5435a of the rotation member 5435 in a state where the one-way clutch 5439 is inserted into the through hole 6434a1 of the back side base member 434a. The

  The through-hole 6434a1 formed in the back side base member 434a is a hole through which the one-way clutch 5439 is inserted from the back side to the front side, and the hole diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the one-way clutch 5439.

  In the one-way clutch 5439, the outer ring 5439b is connected to the shaft hole 5437f1 of the transmission gear 5437f, the inner ring 5439c is connected to the rotating shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5437, and the sliding groove 5439a1 of the switching plate 5439a is connected to the operation element 6438 described later. The

  The operation element 6438 is formed in a vertically long rod-like body when viewed from the front. The operation element 6438 is formed with a connecting pin 6438a protruding forward at the lower end, and a through hole 6438b penetrating in the front-rear direction slightly above the central part in the vertical direction.

  The through-hole 6438b is a hole that is inserted into the insertion pin 6434a2 that protrudes in a columnar shape from the back side of the back side base member 434a to the rear, and is formed to have a larger diameter than the outer diameter of the insertion pin 6434a2.

  Therefore, when the through hole 6438b of the operation element 6438 is inserted into the insertion pin 6434a2 of the back side base member 434a and the bolt T (not shown) is fastened to the distal end of the insertion pin 6434a2, the operation element 6438 is inserted into the through hole 6438b. Is arranged on the back surface of the back side base member 434a in a rotatable state.

  The connecting pin 6438a is a cylindrical body that is inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439, and has an outer diameter dimension smaller than the groove width dimension of the sliding groove 5439a1.

  Therefore, when the connecting pin 6438a of the operating element 6438 is inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439 and the operating element 6438 rotates about the through hole 6438b, the position of the connecting pin 6438a changes, and thus the one-way. The switching plate 5439a of the clutch 5439 can be displaced.

  Further, a torsion spring (not shown) is arranged between the through hole 6438b and the insertion pin 6434a2. One end of the torsion spring is locked to the back side base member 434 a and the other end is locked to the operation element 6438. As a result, the operating element 6438 is always urged in the clockwise direction around the through hole 6438b in the front view. As a result, in a state where no external force is applied to the operation element 6438, the one-way clutch 5439 can be always driven (a state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 is transmitted to the rotation of the rotation member 5435).

  Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 84A is a schematic view of the slide unit 6400 in a state before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and FIG. 84B is a slide unit in a state after the switching plate 5439a is operated. It is the schematic diagram which looked at 6400 front. 85A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 6400 taken along line LXXXVa-LXXXVa in FIG. 84A, and FIG. 85B is a diagram of the slide unit 6400 taken along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. In FIG. 84, the one-way clutch 5439 and the operation element 6438 are shown by broken lines for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 84A and 84B, the base member 6410 is formed with a protrusion 6411a protruding from the bottom surface side of the protruding plate portion 411 of the base member 6410 at the slide end portion of the left slide member 6430. .

  As shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 85 (a), when the external force is not applied to the operation element 6438, the operation element 6438 has a longitudinal direction that coincides with the longitudinal direction of the base member 434. It is arranged with.

  In this case, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is disposed at the end of the cam surface and is bitten by a wedge formed between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is driven. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 84 (b) and 85 (b), the left slide member 6430 slides and the other end of the operation element 6438 disposed on the left slide member 6430 immediately before the end of the slide displacement. The side surface on the right side (upper side) of the right side of the front surface is in contact with the protrusion 6411a of the base member 6410.

  After the side surface of the operation element 6438 and the base member 6410 come into contact with each other, when the left slide member 6430 further moves to the end portion, the operation element 6438 is displaced in the leftward rotation direction when viewed from the front centering on the through hole 6438b.

  Therefore, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connecting pin 6438a of the operation element 6438 is rotated, and the driving state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched.

  When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is disposed at the neutral position of the cam surface and is separated from the meshing space between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is brought into a neutral idling state. As a result, a state in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotation member 5435 can be formed.

  Therefore, by applying an external force to the operating element 6438 according to the displacement amount of the left slide member 6430, a state in which the transmission of rotation of the one-way clutch 5439 is allowed and a state in which the transmission of rotation is blocked are formed. it can.

  That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 is converted into the rotational motion of the rotation member 5435, and the first drive state in which the rotation member 5435 rotates in accordance with the displacement of the left slide member 6430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 When the one-way clutch 5439 is changed from a state allowing the transmission of rotation to a state where the rotation is stopped, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is continued by the inertial force while the left slide member 6430 is stopped. A third driving state can be formed.

  Therefore, the first driving state and the third driving state can be formed, and the number of combinations of the left slide member 6430 and the movement (linear movement and rotation movement) of the rotation member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, since the operation of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is performed by the sliding displacement of the left slide member 6430, there is no need to arrange a motor or the like for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 6430. Thus, the weight of the left slide member 6430 can be reduced. As a result, the load on the driving means for driving the left slide member 6430 can be reduced.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 86, the slide unit 7400 in 7th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 86 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment. In the following, the left slide member 7430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 7450 will be omitted.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 435 and the rotation member 455 are rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described. However, the left slide member 7430 and the right slide member in the seventh embodiment are described. 7450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated and a non-rotating state in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left slide member 7430 and the right slide member 7450 by switching the one-way clutch 5439. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 86, a concave groove 7417 in which a second slide member 7460 described later is disposed is formed on the back surface of the base member 7410.

  The second slide member 7460 is sandwiched and held by a rack gear 7461 having a gear tooth surface formed on the upper surface, two plate members 7462 disposed opposite to the front and rear side surfaces of the rack gear 7461, and the two plate members 7462. And a drive gear 7464 which is disposed above the rack gear 7461 and meshes with the tooth surface of the rack gear 7461. The

  The rack gear 7461 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a gear tooth surface 7461a is formed on the upper surface side. A stop hole 7461b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction when viewed from the front.

  The plate member 7462 is a member for holding a roller 7465 to be described later, and is formed in a plate-like body having a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. In the plate member 7462, a slide groove 7462a positioned on the rack gear 7461 side is recessed in the vertical direction on the side surface, and a through hole 7462b is formed through the slide groove 7462a in the front-rear direction.

  The through hole 7462 b is a through hole for fastening with the rack gear 7461. The plate member 7462 is fixed by inserting a screw (not shown) through the through hole 7462b and fastening the screw with the set hole 7461b of the rack gear 7461.

  The shaft portion 7463 is a columnar member inserted into the sliding groove 7462a of the plate member 7462, and is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the width dimension of the sliding groove 7462a. The axial dimension is formed larger than the thickness (front-rear direction) dimension of the rack gear 7461.

  As a result, when the shaft portion 7463 is sandwiched and held between the two plate members 7462, the shaft portion 7463 can be slid in the up-down direction by the amount that the sliding groove 7462a is recessed in the up-down direction. .

  The outer shape of the roller 7465 is formed in a columnar shape, and a shaft hole penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the shaft center. The roller 7465 has a shaft portion 7463 inserted through the shaft hole and is disposed between two plate members 7462.

  The drive gear 7464 is a member for engaging with the tooth surface 7461a of the rack gear 7461 to apply a driving force that slides and displaces the rack gear 7461 in the left-right direction, and is connected to a motor 7466 described later.

  The motor 7466 is a member that applies a driving force to the rack gear 7461, and is attached to the motor mounting plate 7467 with the shaft of the motor 7466 inserted through the through hole 7467 a of the motor mounting plate 7467.

  Therefore, when a rotational force is applied to the motor 7466, the drive gear 7464 connected to the motor 7466 rotates and the rack gear 7461 can be slid in the left-right direction.

  Of the two plate members 7462, the plate member 7462 disposed on the front side is decorated (displayed with a symbol or the like) on the plane disposed on the front side thereof. Thereby, the second slide member 7460 can be slid and displaced from the position overlapping the left slide member 7430 in the front-rear direction to the position not overlapping, thereby enabling the player to visually recognize the decorative surface.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 87 to 89, the state transition of the left slide member 7430 will be described. 87 to 89 are schematic views of the slide unit 7400 as viewed from the front.

  First, the left slide member 7430 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 87, the left slide member 7430 includes the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment, the movable range of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439, the position of the operating element 6438 before displacement, the through hole 6438b, and the insertion pin. The only difference is that the biasing spring is not disposed between 6434a2 and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, as shown in FIG. 87A, in the state before the left slide member 7430 is slid, the connecting pin 6438a of the operation element 6438 is disposed on the left side in the left-right direction with respect to the through hole 6438b. That is, the other end side (upper end side) of the operation element 6438 is disposed in a state tilted to the right side.

  In this case, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is disposed at the end of the cam surface and is bitten by a wedge formed between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is driven. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

  Therefore, while the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced, the left slide member 7430 is displaced to a position where the other end side (upper end side) of the operation element 6438 contacts the roller 7465 (position shown in FIG. 87B). The rotation member 5435 can be rotated in accordance with the displacement.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), when the operating element 6438 comes into contact with the roller 7465, the other end side (upper end side) of the operating element 6438 is a side surface above the axis of the roller 7465. Abut. Accordingly, since the other end side (upper end side) of the operation element 6438 is tilted to the right side, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid, the operation element is urged downward by the slide displacement. 6438 can be rotated with the through hole 6438b as an axis.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (a), when the longitudinal direction of the operation element 6438 is rotated to a position substantially coincident with the longitudinal direction of the second member, the other end side (upper end side) of the operation element 6438 is a roller 7465. The roller 7465 is in contact with the side surface of the roller 7465 which is located at substantially the same height as the axis.

  Accordingly, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid, the operation element 6438 can be rotated about the through hole 6438b as an axis while urging the roller 7465 to the right by the slide displacement.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (b), when the other end side (upper end side) of the operation element 6438 is disposed in a state tilted to the right side, the connecting pin 6438a of the operation element 6438 is disposed on the left side of the through hole 6438b. Is done.

  Therefore, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connecting pin 6438a of the operation element 6438 is rotated, and the driving state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched.

  As a result, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is disposed at the neutral position of the cam surface and is separated from the meshing space between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is brought into a neutral idling state. As a result, a state in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotation member 5435 can be formed.

  In addition, when the other end side (upper end side) of the operation element 6438 is rotated to a state where the operation element 6438 is tilted to the left side, the other end side (upper end side) of the operation element 6438 is in contact with the side surface below the axis of the roller 7465. Touch. Therefore, since the other end side (upper end side) of the operation element 6438 is tilted to the left side, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid, the roller 7465 can be biased upward by the slide displacement.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 89A, the shaft portion 7463 inserted through the roller 7465 is slid upward. As a result, since the roller 7465 is positioned above the operation element 6438, the operation element 6438 can be displaced to the right side of the roller 7465. Therefore, the left slide member 7430 can be displaced to the position shown in FIG. 89 (b).

  Further, as described above, the rotation of the rotation member 5435 when the left slide member 7430 is positioned on the right side of the roller 7465 is in a state where the one-way clutch 5439 blocks transmission of rotation, so that the left side of the roller 7465 is left. The rotation can be continued by the inertial force of the rotation of the rotating member 5435 when slid.

  Therefore, by applying an external force to the operating element 6438 according to the displacement amount of the left slide member 7430, a state in which the transmission of rotation of the one-way clutch 5439 is allowed and a state in which the transmission of rotation is blocked are formed. it can.

  That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is converted into the rotational motion of the rotary member 5435, and the first drive state in which the rotary member 5435 rotates with the displacement of the left slide member 7430, and the displacement of the left slide member 7430 are changed. In the stopped state, the third driving state in which the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is continued by the inertial force can be formed.

  Therefore, the first driving state and the third driving state can be formed, and the number of combinations of the left slide member 7430 and the movement (linear movement and rotation movement) of the rotation member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in this case, by stopping the inertial force in the third driving state (for example, waiting until a time when the inertial force stops acting), the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is not affected by the rotational motion of the rotating member 5435, A second driving state in which the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced while the rotation member 5435 is not rotated can be formed.

  Therefore, the first drive state, the second drive state, and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of the left slide member 7430 and the motion of the rotating member 5435 (linear motion and rotational motion) can be increased. . As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, since the operation of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is performed by the sliding displacement of the left slide member 7430, there is no need to arrange a motor or the like for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 7430. Therefore, the weight of the left slide member 7430 can be reduced. As a result, the load on the drive means for driving the left slide member 7430 can be reduced.

  In the seventh embodiment, since the second slide member 7460 is disposed so as to be displaceable along the sliding direction of the left slide member 7430, the position where the one-way clutch 5439 is switched, that is, the rotation of the rotation member 5435 is rotated. The position where the allowable state is changed to the restricted state or the allowable state is changed to the restricted state can be changed. Accordingly, the position at which the rotation state of the rotation member 5435 is changed when the left slide member 7430 is slid and the position at which the rotation member 5435 is rotated while the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is stopped is determined. It can change according to a game state etc., As a result, a production effect can be heightened.

  Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430, the second slide member 7460 can also be slid so that the production effect can be enhanced by that amount. Since the role of performing and the role of switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 are combined, there is no need to separately provide means for changing the position for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the seventh embodiment, since the second slide member 7460 is disposed so as to be displaceable along the sliding direction of the left slide member 7430, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched by displacing the second slide member 7460. be able to.

  That is, from the state in which the second slide member 7460 is disposed on either one of the left and right sides of the left slide member 7430, the second slide member 7460 is moved to the other side in the left and right directions while the left slide member 7430 is stopped. By displacing, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 can be switched.

  Therefore, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched without sliding the left slide member 7430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is converted into the rotational motion of the rotation member 5435, and the displacement of the left slide member 7430 is accompanied. The first driving state in which the rotation member 5435 rotates and the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 are not affected by the rotational movement of the rotation member 5435, and the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced while the rotation member 5435 is not rotated. Two drive states can be formed.

  Next, a slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95.

  First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. 90 is a front view of a slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 91 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 8400. FIG. FIG. 92 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 8400. FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 90 to 92, the slide unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment includes a base member 8410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 and a slide bar disposed on the base member 8410. Mainly includes a member 420, a left slide member 8430 slidably connected to the slide bar member 420, and a drive mechanism for sliding the left slide member 8430 along the slide bar member 420. .

  The base member 8410 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and a sliding rod member 420 is disposed on the front side along the longitudinal direction thereof. The base member 8410 is provided with a protruding plate portion 411, and a base-side rack gear 8412 is formed on the upper surface side of the protruding plate portion 411.

  The base-side rack gear 8412 is a rack gear that extends along the longitudinal direction of the sliding rod member 420, and the first-side pinion gear 432 and the second-side pinion gear 8433d of the left slide member 8430 are engaged with each other.

  The left slide member 8430 includes a first member 8431 that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, a base member 8431b that is vertically long when viewed from the front of the first member 8431, and a first member 8431 that is rotatably disposed on the first member 8431. Front-side rectangular second member 8433 having a side pinion gear 432, a second-side rack gear 433a meshed with the first side pinion gear 432, and a front-view rectangular longitudinal base member depending on the second member 8433 8434, a second side pinion gear 8433d rotatably disposed on the second member 8433, and a third member 8445 that is rectangular in a front view and has a third side rack gear 8445a that meshes with the second side pinion gear 8433d. , And a base member 8446 that is horizontally long when viewed from the front and that is suspended by the third member 8445.

  The first member 8431 includes a sliding hole having a circular inner peripheral surface that extends along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted through the sliding hole. Thus, it is possible to slide along the axial direction of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the first member 8431 is slidably disposed on the base member 8410 via the sliding rod member 420.

  First side pinion gear 432 is meshed with base side rack gear 8412 of base member 8410. Therefore, when the first member 8431 is slid with respect to the base member 8410, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated by receiving the action from the base side rack gear 8412 along with the sliding displacement.

  The second member 8433 is disposed in the first member 8431 so as to be displaceable, and the sliding member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole in the upper end portion, so that the second member 8433 is relatively displaced with respect to the first member 8431. The sliding rod member 420 is slidable.

  In this case, the second side rack gear 433a is engraved on the lower surface of the second member 8433. Accordingly, the second member 8433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431.

  Further, the second side pinion gear 8433d is meshed with the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410. Therefore, when the second member 8433 is slid and displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second side pinion gear 8433d is rotated by receiving an action from the base side rack gear 8412 along with the sliding displacement.

  The third member 8445 is disposed in the second member 8433 so as to be displaceable, and the sliding member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole in the upper end portion, so that the third member 8445 is relatively displaced with respect to the second member 8433. The sliding rod member 420 is slidable.

  In this case, a third side rack gear 8445a is engraved on the lower surface of the third member 8445. The third side rack gear 8445a is meshed with the second side pinion gear 8433d. Therefore, as described above, when the second side pinion gear 8433d is rotated in accordance with the displacement of the second member 8433, the third member 8445 receives the action from the second side pinion gear 8433d, so that the third member 8445 becomes the second member. Relative to 8433.

  That is, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is engaged with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 8433, the second member 8433 is A driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and a driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid relative to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 is slid relative to the base member 8410 in a state where the second member 8433 is accelerated relative to the first member 8431. Can do.

  Further, since the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is engaged with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445, the third member 8445 The driving force accompanying the linear motion of the second member 8433 and the driving force accompanying the rotational motion of the second side pinion gear 8433d can be applied. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slid with respect to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 is slid with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the third member 8433 is accelerated more than the second member 8433. Can do.

  Next, the operation of the slide unit 8400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94. 93 (a) to 93 (c) are schematic views of the slide unit 8400 as viewed from the front, and illustrate a transition state when the left slide member 8430 is slid. 94A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 taken along the line XCIVa-XCIVa in FIG. 93A, and FIG. 94B is a diagram of the slide unit 8400 taken along the line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. FIG. 94C is a schematic cross-sectional view, and FIG. 94C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 taken along the line XCIVc-XCIVc in FIG. In FIG. 93, the cover member 416, the guide member 419, and the drive motor 475 are removed.

  93 (a) and 94 (a), in a state where the left slide member 8430 is disposed at the retracted position, the second member 8433 is disposed inside the first member 8431, and the second member 8433 is disposed. A third member 8445 is disposed on the inner side.

  In this case, the base member 8434 suspended from the second member 8433 is positioned in front of the base member 8431b suspended from the first member 8431, and the base member 8446 of the third member 8445 is disposed in front of the base member 8434. Is done.

  That is, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction (in a state of overlapping in the front-rear direction) (see FIG. 5A). Therefore, when the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 are slid, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be slid without being interfered with each other. . Further, the space for disposing the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced.

  Further, the effect region K formed in the center portion of the game board (in FIG. 93 (a), the base member 8410) can be reduced by the amount of space for disposing the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445. A region where the lower side of the base member 8446 overlaps with the left side of the base member 8446).

  When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 91) is driven in the forward direction from the state in which the left slide member 8430 is disposed at the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated and left The left drive gear 471 meshed with the pinion gear 473 is rotated.

  When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first side rack gear 431a of the first member 8431 that meshes with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slid.

  In this case, as described above, the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 8433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are disposed to face each other in a parallel attitude, and the second side rack gear 433a and the base side Since the first side pinion gear 432 that is pivotally supported by the first member 8431 is provided in a state of being engaged with both of the rack gears 412, the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear of the second member 8433. The first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both of the first member 8431 and the driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 with respect to the second member 8433, and the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432. The driving force accompanying the movement can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid relative to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 is slid relative to the base member 8410 in a state where the second member 8433 is accelerated relative to the first member 8431. Can do.

  Accordingly, the first member 8431 and the second member 8433 of the slide unit 8400 are slid to the effect area K (shielded state) or retracted from the effect area K (open state), thereby shortening the time required for shielding. Switching between the state and the open state can be performed quickly.

  Further, the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are disposed in a mutually parallel posture, and the teeth are attached to both the third side rack gear 8445a and the base side rack gear 412. Since the second side pinion gear 8433d pivotally supported by the second member 8433 is interposed in the combined state, both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445 are Since the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is engaged, the driving force accompanying the linear motion of the second member 8433 and the driving force accompanying the rotational motion of the second side pinion gear 8433d are applied to the third member 8445. Can be granted. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slid with respect to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 is slid with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the third member 8433 is accelerated more than the second member 8433. Can do.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), the second member 8433 can be slid relative to the first member 8431. Further, the third member 8445 can be slidably displaced relative to the second member 8433.

  This shortens the time required to slide the second member 8433 and the third member 8445 of the slide unit 8400 to the effect area K (shielded state) or retract from the effect area K (open state), thereby shielding the slide. Switching between the state and the open state can be performed quickly.

  93 (c) and 94 (c), in the state where the left slide member 8430 is disposed at the extended position, the second member 8433 leaves a part of the overlap from the inside of the first member 8431. The third member 8445 is disposed in a state of protruding from the inside of the second member 8433 leaving a partial overlap.

  In this case, in this embodiment, the left side surface of the base member 8431b suspended from the first member 8431 and the right side surface of the base member 8434 suspended from the second member 8433 are substantially in the front-rear direction. Arranged at the same position. Further, the left side surface of the base member 8434 suspended from the second member 8433 and the right side surface of the base member 8446 suspended from the third member 8445 are disposed at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. The

  That is, no gap is formed between the base member. Therefore, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be disposed over the entire production area K.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 to 98, a slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment will be described.

  First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. FIG. 95 is an exploded front perspective view of a slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 96 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 9430.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the base member 434 is suspended from the second member 433 has been described. However, in the slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment, the base member 9431b is suspended from the first member 431 and the second member 8433 is suspended. A base member 9434 is provided depending on the base. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment includes a base member 8410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 and a slide bar disposed on the base member 8410. It mainly includes a member 420, a left slide member 9430 slidably connected to the slide bar member 420, and a drive mechanism for slidingly moving the left slide member 9430 along the slide guide groove.

  The left slide member 9430 includes a first member 8431 that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, a base member 9431b that is vertically long when viewed from the front of the first member 8431, and a first member 8431 that is rotatably disposed on the first member 8431. Front-side rectangular second member 9433 having a side pinion gear 432, a second-side rack gear 433a with which the first side pinion gear 432 is engaged, and a front-side rectangular longitudinal base member depending on the second member 9433 9434, a slide rail 9443 disposed on the base member 9434, a rectangular base member 9446 that is rectangular in front view connected to the slide rail 9443, and a thread-like wire 9444 that can be freely deformed. Configured.

  The first member 8431 includes a sliding hole having a circular inner peripheral surface that extends along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted through the sliding hole. Thus, it is possible to slide along the axial direction of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the first member 8431 is slidably disposed on the base member 9410 via the sliding rod member 420.

  The base member 9431b has a concave groove formed from the back side on the side surface on the left side when viewed from the front at the upper end side, and a columnar connecting shaft 9431b1 extending upward and downward inside the concave groove. It is formed (see FIG. 98).

  The second member 9433 is disposed in the first member 8431 so as to be displaceable, and the sliding member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole in the upper end portion, so that the second member 9433 is relatively displaced with respect to the first member 8431. The sliding rod member 420 is slidable.

  In this case, the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is engaged with both the base side rack gear 9412 of the base member 9410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 9433. The driving force accompanying the linear motion of the first member 8431 and the driving force accompanying the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 is slid with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the second member 9433 is accelerated more than the first member 8431. Can do.

  The base member 9434 is formed with a notch 9434c in which a right side surface in front view on the upper end side is notched in the front-rear direction, and a disk-shaped roller 9434d is rotatably disposed inside the notch 9434c. In addition, a slide rail 9443, which will be described later, is disposed on the base member 9434 in front of the upper end side in a state in which the expansion / contraction direction is the left-right direction.

  The roller 9434d is a member for assisting the displacement of the wire 9444, which will be described later, and the vertical position thereof is arranged at the same position as the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member 8431.

  The slide rail 9443 is a member for holding the third member so as to be slidable. The slide rail 9443 is formed of two plates and the plates can be slidably displaced. Further, the slide rail 9443 has a coil spring (not shown) disposed therein, and is urged in a direction in which the plates are separated from each other.

  The base member 9437 is arranged to be slidable with respect to the second member 9433 by fastening the back side of the base member 9437 to the slide rail 9443.

  The base member 9437 is formed with a concave groove that is recessed from the back side on the side surface on the right side when viewed from the front, and a cylindrical connecting shaft 9446a that extends vertically is formed inside the concave groove. Is done. Further, the connecting shaft 9446a is arranged at a position in the vertical direction substantially the same as the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member 8431.

  The wire 9444 is a member for displacing the base member 9437 in accordance with the displacement of the first member 8431 and the second member 9433, and is formed from a piano wire, a fishing line, or the like. One end of the wire 9444 is connected to the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member, and the other end is connected to the connecting shaft 9446a of the third member 9533. The wire 9444 has a connection path for connecting one end and the other end between the base member 9431b of the first member 8431 and the base member 9434 of the second member 9433, and the roller 9434d of the second member 9433. It arrange | positions in the state which a part and side contact | abutted (refer FIG. 9).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98, the operation of the slide unit 9400 will be described. 97 (a) to 97 (c) are front views of the slide unit 9400, and a transition state when the left slide member 9430 is slid and displaced is illustrated. FIG. 98 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 along the line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa in FIG. 97 (a), and FIG. 98 (b) is a diagram of the slide unit 9400 along the line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 97 (b). FIG. 98C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 taken along the line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc of FIG. 97C. In FIG. 93, the cover member 416, the guide member 419, and the drive motor 475 are removed.

  97A and 98A, when the left slide member 9430 is disposed at the retracted position, the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 are at different positions in the front-rear direction. Placed in. Accordingly, the base member 9431b, the base member 9446, and the base member 9446 can be slid and displaced without interfering with each other. The space for disposing the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can be reduced to reduce the size.

  Further, the space for arranging the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can be reduced, so that an effect area K formed in the center of the game board can be secured.

  Further, in a state where the left slide member 9430 is disposed at the retracted position, the base member 9446 is moved leftward with respect to the base member 9434 by the biasing force of the slide rail disposed between the base member 9434 and the base member 9446. Although a sliding force is applied, the base member 9434 connects the wire 9444 to the connecting shaft 9431b1 and the connecting shaft 9438, and the connecting path is between the base member 9431b and the base member 9434. It can suppress that 9446 slide-displaces to the left with respect to the base member 9434. FIG.

  That is, the length dimension of the wire 9444 is a dimension obtained by combining the length dimension of the base member 9434 in the left-right direction and the dimension of the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 in the thickness direction. 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can be maintained in the front-rear direction.

  When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 95) is driven in the forward direction from the state in which the left slide member 9430 is disposed at the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated and the left pinion gear is rotated. The left drive gear 471 connected to 473 is rotated.

  When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first side rack gear 431a of the first member 8431 that meshes with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slid.

  In this case, as described above, the first side pinion gear 432 that is pivotally supported by the first member 8431 while being engaged with both the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 9433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410. Therefore, the driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and the driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied to the second member 9433. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 is slid with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the second member 9433 is accelerated more than the first member 8431. Can do.

  Accordingly, the first member 8431 and the second member 9433 of the slide unit 9400 are slid to the effect area K (shielded state) or retracted from the effect area K (open state) to shorten the time required for the shield. Switching between the state and the open state can be performed quickly.

  In this case, the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 are disposed at positions where the positions in the front-rear direction are shifted. That is, the overlap dimension in the front-rear direction between the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 is displaced from the overlap dimension L3 shown in FIG. 9A to the overlap dimension L4 shown in FIG. 9B.

  Therefore, the wire 9444 can be loosened by the amount that the overlap dimension in the front-rear direction between the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 is displaced from L3 to L4 (L3> L4). Therefore, the base member 9446 can be slid and displaced with respect to the base member 9434 by the urging force of the slide rail 9443 as much as the wire 9444 is loosened. As a result, when the base member 9431b is slid with respect to the base member 8410, the base member 9446 can be slid with respect to the base member 9434 in a state where the base member 9446 is accelerated more than the base member 9434.

  This shortens the time required to slide and displace the base member 9434 and the base member 9446 of the slide unit 9400 to the effect area K (shielded state) or retreat from the effect area K (open state). The open state can be quickly switched.

  93 (c) and 94 (c), in a state where the left slide member 9430 is disposed at the extended position, the left side surface of the base member 9431b and the right side surface of the base member 9434 are The side surfaces are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. Further, the left side surface of the base member 9434 and the right side surface of the base member 9446 are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction.

  That is, no gap is formed between the base member. Therefore, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be disposed over the entire production area K.

  In the ninth embodiment, since the slide displacement of the base member 9446 can be performed by the slide rail 9443 and the wire 9444, the third member 8445 is disposed above the base member 8446 as in the eighth embodiment. There is no need to do. Accordingly, since the third member 8445 is not disposed, the distance between the base member 8410 and the sliding rod member 420 in the longitudinal direction can be reduced, and the space for disposing the base member 8410 can be suppressed to reduce the size. Can be planned.

  Next, an elevating unit 800 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 102.

  First, the overall configuration of the lifting unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. 99 (a) is a front view of the lifting unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment, FIG. 99 (b) is a rear view of the lifting unit 10800, and FIG. 99 (c) is a side view of the lifting unit 10800. It is. FIG. 100 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting unit 10800. FIG.

  Although 1st Embodiment demonstrated each movable unit (slide unit 400, the protrusion unit 700, and the raising / lowering unit 800) arrange | positioned at the operation | movement unit 200 in the combined | combined (overhang | projection) position, it mutually disconnected. In the tenth embodiment, the movable units (the slide unit 400, the protruding unit 700, and the elevating unit 10800) disposed in the operation unit 10200 are connected to each other in the combined state. These parts are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the elevating unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment includes an elevating member 10820 disposed on the base member 810 so as to be elevable. The elevating member 10820 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and mainly includes a protrusion 821 protruding to the back side and an engaging portion 10822 formed to protrude from the back side.

  The engaging portion 10822 is a rectangular protrusion that is engaged by the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 when the operation unit 200 is displaced into the combined state. It is formed to protrude from the back side of 10820. The engaging portion 10822 is set to have a left-right dimension that is substantially the same as or slightly larger than the distance between the opposing rotating members 435 and 455 in the combined state, and is larger than the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400. It is formed in a state protruding to the back side. Therefore, when the operation unit 200 is displaced into the combined state, the rotating members 435 and 455 and the engaging portion 10822 can be brought into contact with each other (see FIG. 102A).

  Further, the engaging portion 10822 includes a through-hole 10822a that protrudes in a rectangular shape from the back side of the elevating member 10820 and penetrates in the gravity direction. The through hole 10822a is a member through which the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 is inserted, and is formed in an opening larger than the distal end portion of the protruding member 735 in a top view. Thereby, when the operation unit 200 is displaced into the combined state, the tip of the protruding member 735 can be inserted into the through hole 10822a (see FIG. 102B).

  Next, the operation unit 10200 in the combined state will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 is an operation unit 10200 in the combined state, FIG. 102 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit 10200 along the line CIIa-CIIa in FIG. 101, and FIG. 102 (b) is a diagram of CIIb- in FIG. It is a schematic cross section of the operation unit 10200 in the CIIb line.

  As shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are brought into contact with the side surface of the engaging portion 10822 in the lifting unit 10800 (the lifting member 10820) of the operation unit 10200 in the combined state. (See FIG. 102 (a)).

  Note that the engaging portion 10822 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape whose width is reduced as the outer shape thereof is directed downward in the rear view. That is, the left and right (left and right sides in FIG. 99 (b)) side surfaces of the engaging portion 10822 are formed so as to be inclined toward the central portion in the left-right direction as going downward.

  Further, as described above, the protruding member 735 is inserted into the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822. In this case, an inclined portion 10735a is formed on the back surface side of the protruding member 735 so that the protruding distance increases as it goes downward, so that the inner wall of the through-hole 10822a and the inclined portion 10735a can come into contact with each other. .

  Therefore, since the lifting unit 10800, the slide unit 400, and the protruding unit 700 can be brought into contact (connected) with the engaging portion 10822, each movable unit (the lifting unit 10800, the slide unit in the combined state) can be brought into contact. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of deviation in the arrangement of the unit 400 and the protruding unit 700). As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of unity of the movable units in the combined state, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Since the movable units are connected to each other, the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 can be transmitted to the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700.

  More specifically, the lift member 10820 is displaced up and down (vibrates) at a relatively small distance by repeatedly applying a relatively small rotational drive to the drive motor 891 that drives the lift member 10820 in a reciprocating manner.

  In this case, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are brought into contact with the left and right side surfaces (FIG. 99 (b) left and right) of the engaging portion 10822, and therefore are engaged by the inclined shape of the left and right side surfaces. The side in contact with the joint portion 10822 can be displaced outward in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 101) of the operation unit 10200.

  The rotating members 435 and 455 are given a rotational moment in a direction that displaces the side in contact with the engaging portion 10822 by the center of gravity toward the inner side in the left-right direction of the operation unit 10200 at the combined (extended) position. . Therefore, the rotating members 435 and 455 that are rotationally displaced by the displacement of the elevating member 10820 can come into contact with the engaging portion 10822 again by the rotational moment. As a result, the elevating member 10820 is periodically and repeatedly displaced, whereby the rotating members 435 and 455 can be periodically and repeatedly displaced.

  On the other hand, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 has the inclined portion 10735a in contact with the through-hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822, and thus the inclined member 10735 is given cyclic displacement to the elevating member 10820. The inner surface of the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822 slides on the inclined surface. Therefore, the distance by which the protruding member 735 is pushed forward (leftward in FIG. 102B) is periodically displaced by the inclination of the inclined surface 10735a. As a result, the lifting member 10820 is periodically and repeatedly displaced, whereby the protruding member 735 can be periodically and repeatedly displaced. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the driving energy because it is not necessary to apply a driving force to the other driving motors 763, 475, and 476.

  In other words, the elevating member 10820 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 at the combined (extension) position, and the elevating member 10820 is formed to be capable of periodic displacement. The rotation member 730 and the rotation members 435 and 455 can be periodically displaced using the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820. In other words, the pattern (character) formed by the rotating member 730 (elevating base 720), the rotating members 435 and 455, and the elevating member 10820 can be vibrated, thereby enhancing the staging effect. . In this case, the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 is forcibly displaced by bringing them into contact with each other, and a mechanism for periodically displacing the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 is provided. There is no need. Accordingly, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, since the rotation member 730 and the rotation members 435 and 455 are in a state of being separated (non-contacting) from each other, a periodic displacement can be applied from the elevating member 10820 without being affected by each other. it can. That is, the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 can be easily transmitted to each of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455.

  Further, the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are not associated with each other and can be periodically displaced (vibrated) in different manners. That is, since the rotation member 730 and the rotation members 435 and 455 have different configurations (the number of components and the shape of each component), even if the same vibration is transmitted from the elevating member 10820, it is vibrated in a different manner. Therefore, the portion formed by the rotating member 730 and the portion formed by the rotating members 435 and 455 in one character can be vibrated in different manners. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced accordingly.

  For example, in the case of the tenth embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 are disposed so as to be rotatable with respect to the base members 434 and 454, so that the circumferential direction about the rotation axis is caused by the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820. The rotating member 730 can be configured to periodically repeat the operation of being pushed back and forth by the inclination of the inclined portion 10735 of the protruding member 735.

  In addition, since the rotating members 435 and 455 and the protruding member 735 are directly connected to a driving source that is displaced (vibrated), the driving force can be transmitted efficiently.

  That is, when the projecting member 735 is connected to each of the rotating members 435 and 455, the driving force that displaces (vibrates) the projecting member 735 is transmitted through each of the rotating members 435 and 455. In the tenth embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 and the projecting member 735 are directly connected to the driving source that is displaced (vibrated), so that the driving force is efficiently transmitted. be able to.

  Further, the elevating member 10820 is disposed at a position in front of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 at the combined (extended) position, and thus is disposed closer to the player. The lifting member 10820 can be periodically displaced (vibrated). That is, since the pattern (character) is vibrated by using the lifting member 10820 on the near side that is easily visible to the player as a vibration source, it is possible to produce an effect that can easily convey the force of vibration to the player.

  Next, the operation unit 200 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 107.

  First, the drive body 11761 in 11th Embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 (a) is a front view of the driving body 11761 in a state where the driving body 11761 according to the eleventh embodiment is disposed at the first rotation position, and FIG. 103 (b) is a diagram illustrating the second rotation of the driving body 11761. It is a front view of the drive body 761 of the state arrange | positioned in the position.

  In the first embodiment, the cam portion of the driving body 761 is arranged such that the interposing member 733 descends with the rotation of the driving body 761 that displaces the protruding member 735 to the protruding position (a state protruding from the rotating member 730). In the eleventh embodiment, the interposed member 733 is moved in accordance with the rotation of the driving body 11761 that displaces the protruding member 735 to the protruding position (a state protruding from the rotating member 730). A cam portion 11761b of the driving body 11761 is formed so as to rise. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b), the cam portion 11761b of the driving body 11761 of the eleventh embodiment is placed on the sliding wall 733c in a state where the driving body 11761 is arranged at the first rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R3) at the cam surface (position P1) to be abutted is set to the minimum diameter, and the cam abutted against the sliding wall 733c in a state where the driving body 11761 is disposed at the second rotational position. The cam diameter (radius R4) at the surface (position P2) is set to the maximum diameter, and the cam diameter is continuously increased from the position P1 toward the position P2.

  Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (that is, the interposed member 733) is the lowest from the lowermost position when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by the action of the cam portion 761b. When the drive body 761 is continuously raised from above and rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, it is continuously lowered from the lowermost position to the uppermost position.

  Accordingly, when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the cam diameter of the cam portion 11761b is increased to the position P2 which is the maximum diameter, so that the interposed member 733 is pushed up to the uppermost position. Accordingly, the tip of the swinging member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 104 to FIG. 107, the displacement state when each movable unit (the slide unit 400, the projecting unit 11700, and the lifting unit 800) is displaced into the combined state will be described. 104 to 107 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. 104 to 107 sequentially illustrate the displacement state when each movable unit is displaced into the combined (overhanging) state with FIG. 104 as the initial position.

  The operation of each movable unit arranged in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. In the tenth embodiment, the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation will be described in order from the initial position shown in FIG.

  In the first operation, the lifting base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is slid upward with respect to the base member 710. In the second operation, the protrusion unit 11700 continues its operation from the first operation, the base members 434 and 435 of the slide unit 400 slide to the center of the gaming machine 10, and the rotating members 435 and 455 are about 45 degrees. As a result of the rotational displacement, the lifting member 820 of the lifting unit 800 is slid downward. In the third operation, the projecting member 835 of the projecting unit 800 is slid upward and the tip of the swinging member 832 is rotationally displaced upward.

  First, as shown in FIG. 104, the protruding unit 11700 of the operation unit 200 in the initial position is disposed in a state where the tip of the swinging member 732 is close to the rotating member 11730. Therefore, the space formed in the central part of the operation unit 200 in the retracted state can be increased. That is, it is possible to reduce the arrangement space of each movable unit in the retracted state and to increase the amount of extension during the extension operation.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, in the first operation, the protrusion unit 11700 is displaced. As shown in FIG. 105, the protrusion unit 11700 is displaced in the first operation by sliding the lifting base 720 relative to the base member 710. Thereby, the raising / lowering base 720 and the rotation member 730 of the protrusion unit 700 are displaced to the united position. In addition, since detailed description of the displacement of the raising / lowering base 720 is the same as that of 1st Embodiment, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the second operation is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the lifting unit 800. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 430 and 450 (base members 434 and 454) are set to the same distance.

  Due to the displacement of the second operation, the lifting base 720 of the projecting unit 11700 moves up and down with respect to the base member 710, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced to the center, and the lifting member 820 of the lifting unit 800 is The member 810 is displaced downward. In the third state, the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 1170 is housed inside the rotating member 11730.

  Further, in this case, the tip of the swinging member 732 of the rotating member 11730 is a lowered position that is close to the rotating member 11730. Accordingly, the rotating member 11730 is maintained in a state in which the swinging member 732 is close to the rotating member 11730 until the rotating member 11730 is arranged at the united (extended position), and thus rotates in the middle of the displacement to the united position. It is possible to suppress the members 435 and 455 from interfering with the swing member 732. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the pattern (character) formed by each movable unit (the elevating member 820, the rotating members 435 and 455, and the rotating member 11730) is formed, and enhance the effect.

  Furthermore, since the tip of the swing member 732 is at a lowered position close to the rotation member 11730, the gap between the rotation members 435 and 455 and the swing member 732 can be increased, so that the rotation member 435 and 455 can be formed large. Therefore, a pattern (character) formed by combining the members (rotating members 435 and 455, the elevating base 11720 (rotating member 11730) and the elevating member 820) of each movable unit (slide unit 400, protruding unit 11700 and elevating unit 800). ) Can be increased.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the third operation is performed by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700 (rotating the driving body 11761). That is, only the displacement of the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700 is performed at the end of the operation of each operation unit (the slide unit 400 and the lifting unit 800). As described above, the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 11700 can displace the swinging member 732 along with the displacement.

  Therefore, with the displacement of the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700, the tip of the swinging member 732 can be raised in the direction away from the rotating member 11730. Therefore, when the operation unit 200 is in the combined (extension) position, the elevating member 820, the rotating members 435 and 455, and the rotating member 11730 (elevating and lowering) are separated by separating the tip of the swinging member 732 from the rotating member 11730. The pattern (character) formed by the base 720) can be made larger.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is brought into contact (collision) with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) in the slide unit 400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Instead, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) may be formed so as to contact the base member 410.

  In this case, the base member 410 is provided with a contact portion, and the contact portion is disposed at one end (end point) of the slide displacement range of the left slide member 430 (first member 431). When the stop position of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) extends beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions of the left drive motor 475 or variations in control of the left drive motor 475, the first member 431 is contacted. The member is brought into contact with the member (that is, the member to be contacted is caused to function as a stopper for restricting the displacement of the left slide member 430). By causing the first member 431 whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433 to contact the contacted member, the impact at the time of the contact is weakened, and damage to both is suppressed. be able to.

  In the first embodiment, in the slide unit 400, the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), which is a contact target of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) (a member to which the first member 431 is contacted). Although the case where the displacement is a slide displacement (linear motion) and the direction of the displacement is parallel to the direction of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) has been described. The contact object of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) has at least a displacement component in a direction parallel to the slide displacement direction of the left slide member 430 (first member 431). For example, the form of the displacement is arbitrary. Therefore, the displacement of the contact target may be a rotational motion or a motion along a curve.

  Thus, if the contact target has at least a displacement component in a direction parallel to the slide displacement direction of the left slide member 430 (first member 431), the left slide member 430 (first member 431). When the contact is made, the object to be contacted can be retracted (released) by the parallel displacement component described above, and the buffering action can be exerted accordingly. Further, by displacing the contact target in the opposite direction to the contact, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is pushed back by the parallel displacement component described above, and the initial operation of the left slide member 430 ( The operation of starting the slide displacement from the stop state) can be assisted.

  Note that the contact target need not be driven by the driving means. Instead of driving by the driving means, or in addition to driving by the driving means, it is formed so as to be urged by an urging means (an elastic material such as rubber or urethane, a spring such as a coil spring or a torsion spring). Also good. In this case, when the left slide member 430 (the first member 431) is brought into contact, the urging means is elastically deformed so that the above-described buffering action can be exerted, and the elastic recovery force can be increased. By pushing back the left slide member 430 (first member 431), the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be assisted.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are disposed substantially simultaneously at the extended position in the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, the upper displacement member 530 is first disposed in the overhang position, and then the lower displacement member 640 is disposed in the overhang position (that is, the lower contact portion 643 is in contact with the upper contact portion 533 in the stopped state). It may be a thing to be touched. Even in this case, as in the case of the above embodiment, the impact at the time of contact (collision) is weakened and rebounded by the change (decrease) of the speed component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640. Can be suppressed.

  In the first embodiment, in the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600, the upper displacement member that is the contact object of the lower displacement member 640 (the object to which the lower displacement member 640 is contacted (combined) at the extended position). Although the case where 530 is formed to be displaceable has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the contact target may be stopped (not displaceable). Even in this case, as in the case of the above embodiment, the impact at the time of contact (collision) is weakened and rebounded by the change (decrease) of the speed component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640. Can be suppressed.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at the extended position in the lower unit 600 is described as the extended rotation position. It is not limited.

  For example, the rotation position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at the extended position may be set as the vertical rotation position. That is, the state in which the drive arm 630 is rotated to the vertical rotation position is defined as the extended position of the lower displacement member 640, and the lower displacement member 640 is formed in contact with the upper displacement member 530 at the extended position. May be.

  Alternatively, the rotational position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at the extended position is the rotational position between the horizontal rotational position and the vertical rotational position (for example, the drive arm 630 is 80 degrees from the horizontal rotational position). Rotated rotational position). That is, the state in which the drive arm 630 is rotated to the rotation position between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position is defined as the extension position of the lower displacement member 640, and the lower displacement member 640 is the upper displacement member at the extension position. You may form so that it may contact | abut to 530. FIG.

  In any of these configurations, a change (decrease) in the speed component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640 can weaken the impact at the time of contact (collision) and suppress rebound.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the lower displacement member 640 is displaced by the rotation of the drive arm 630 in the lower unit 600 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other structures may be adopted. good. As another structure, for example, a cylindrical guide pin protrudes from the back surface of the lower displacement member 640 (the back surface corresponding to the drive arm connecting shaft 641), and a guide groove in which the guide pin can slide is provided. A structure in which the lower displacement member 640 is displaced between the retracted position and the extended position by extending the base member 610 and sliding the guide pin along the guide groove is exemplified.

  In the case of such a structure, at least the component of the displacement (speed) component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the contact target (the target on which the lower displacement member 640 contacts (combines) at the extended position) is The shape of the guide groove is set so as to decrease at least in the vicinity of the overhang position. Thus, as in the case of the first embodiment, the impact at the time of contact (collision) is weakened and rebound is suppressed by the change (decrease) of the speed component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640. can do.

  In the first embodiment, in the upper unit 500 and the lower unit 600, only the lower unit 600 (the lower displacement member 640) is formed so that the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target can be reduced. However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of this, or in addition to this, the upper unit 500 (upper displacement member 530) is formed so that the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target can be reduced. May be. In this case, the upper united unit 500 may be disposed by vertically inverting the lower united unit 600.

  In the first embodiment, in the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600, the drive states (supply power) of the drive motors 543 and 672 are constant (that is, the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 are constant). However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the drive state (supply power) of the drive motors 543 and 672 is increased or decreased (that is, the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation of the drive arm 630). The speed may be increased or decreased). For example, the power supplied to the drive motors 543 and 672 is reduced so that at least the component in the direction toward the other party among the velocity components of the upper displacement member 530 or the lower displacement member 640 decreases in the vicinity of the overhang position, The form which reduces the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotational speed of the drive arm 630 is illustrated. It should be noted that only one of the drive motors 543 and 672 may be reduced or both may be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, in the protrusion unit 700, the position where the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c of the interposition member 733 and the cam surface of the cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 are in contact with each other is the rotation of the driving body 761 in front view. Although the case where it is located on the vertical line passing through the center has been described (see FIG. 40), the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the position where the bottom surface and the cam surface contact each other passes through the rotation center of the driving body 761. It may be set at a position separated from the vertical line to one side in the horizontal direction. In this case, when the swinging member 732 and the interposed member 733 are lowered by their own weight, the swinging member 732 and the interposed member are arranged so that the driving body 761 is rotated in the rotation direction for raising the protruding member 735. When the weight of the member 733 is applied to the driving body 761 and the projecting member 735 is lowered by its own weight, the driving body 761 is rotated in the rotation direction in which the swinging member 732 and the interposed member 733 are raised. It is preferable to form the swing member 732 and the interposed member 733 so that the weight of the swing member 732 and the interposed member 733 is applied to the driving body 761. This is because the load of the drive motor 763 can be suppressed by utilizing the weight of the swinging member 732, the interposed member 733, and the protruding member 735.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 is continuously reduced from the maximum diameter of the radius R1 to the minimum diameter of the radius R2 in the protruding unit 700 has been described. It is not limited. For example, the cam diameter in a predetermined range from the position P1 in the state where the driving body 761 is disposed at the first rotation position may be set to the same radius as the radius R1. The central angle of the predetermined range is preferably set corresponding to an angle required for the sliding pin 761c of the driving body 761 to pass through the curved portion 735b1 in the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735. The timing at which the displacement of the swing member 732 is started can be made coincident with the timing at which the displacement of the projecting member 735 is started, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

  In the first embodiment, in the protrusion unit 700, while one of the swinging member 732 or the protrusion member 735 has a displacement (speed) component upward in the vertical (gravity) direction, the other is vertical (gravity). While one of the swinging member 732 and the protruding member 735 has a downward (gravity) displacement (velocity) component, the other is vertical (gravity). ) The case where the load on the drive motor 763 is made uniform by forming it so as to have a displacement (speed) component upward in the direction has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 is not necessarily limited thereto. The load on the drive motor 763 may be made uniform by combining the shape of the cam (cam diameter) and the shape of the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 (the distance from the rotation center of the drive body 761).

  In other words, in a region where the load required to act on the sliding wall 733c from the cam portion 761b is relatively large, the load necessary to act on the sliding hole 735b from the sliding pin 761c is increased. The shape of the sliding hole 735b is set so as to be relatively small, and conversely, in the region where the load required to act on the sliding hole 735b from the sliding pin 761c is relatively large, The shape of the cam portion 761b is set so that the load necessary for exerting an action from the cam portion 761b on the moving wall 733c becomes relatively small.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 792 acts as the urging force in the direction of lowering the sliding member 735 (sliding downward) in the protruding unit 700 has been described. However, the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 792 may be applied as a biasing force in the direction in which the protruding member 735 is lifted (sliding upward). In this case, the initial speed when the protruding member 735 is slid upward from the stopped state can be increased by the synergistic effect with the curved portion 735b1 in the sliding hole 735b described above.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the transmission gear 2437a includes the tooth portion 2437a1 and the bulging portion 2437a2 in the slide unit 2400 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, for example, the left of the rotation transmission member 2485 The rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 may be formed with bulging portions whose tooth thickness gradually decreases. Also in this case, as in the second embodiment, it is possible to smoothly perform the meshing when switching from the second driving state in which the meshing is released to the first driving state in which the meshing is performed.

  Furthermore, bulging portions may be formed on both sides of the gears arranged in the vertical direction of the transmission gear 2437a, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414. In this case, since the bulging portions are formed in the gears that mesh with each other when switching from the second driving state to the first driving state, the first driving that meshes from the second driving state in which the meshing is released. Switching to the state can be performed more smoothly.

  Further, in this case, by forming the bulging portions where the tooth thickness gradually decreases on both sides of the gear to be engaged, the thickness dimension of the bulging portion (the gear width direction dimension) can be reduced.

  In the second and third embodiments, in the slide unit 2400 and the slide unit 3400, when the left slide members 430 and 2430 are displaced from the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine) to the overhanging position (position on the center of the gaming machine). Although the case where the first drive state is displaced to the second drive state has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the left slide members 430 and 430 are extended from the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine) to the extended position ( When displaced to the center of the gaming machine), it may be displaced from the second drive state to the first drive state.

  In the fourth embodiment, in the slide unit 4400, the teeth adjacent to the notches 4413a and 4414a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 are made into small tooth portions formed in a small size, so that the rigidity is increased. Although the case where it makes high is demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this, You may make the dimension of the tooth | gear width of the tooth | gear adjacent to notch part 4413a, 4414a large, and may make the rigidity high.

  Also in this case, as in the fourth embodiment, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the notches 4413a and 4414a are damaged when switching from the third driving state to the first driving state. And the durability of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 can be improved.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the protrusion 6411a that gives displacement to the operation element 6438 is formed on the base member 6411 in the slide unit 6400 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion 6411a is connected to the back case 300. And may be arranged so as to contact the operation element 6438. That is, the position where the protrusion 6411 a is formed is not limited to the base member 6411, but may be formed on a member on the displacement locus of the operation element 6438.

  In the sixth and seventh embodiments, in the slide unit 6400 and the slide unit 7400, when the left slide members 6430 and 7430 are displaced from the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine) to the extended position (position on the center of the gaming machine). Although the case where the first drive state is displaced to the second drive state or the third drive state has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the left slide members 6430 and 7430 are in the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine). When it is displaced from the extended position to the overhanging position (position at the center of the gaming machine), it may be displaced from the second driving state to the first driving state.

  In the seventh embodiment, the case where the roller 7465 for displacing the operation element 6438 in the slide unit 7400 is disposed on the second slide member 7640 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the operation element 6438 is not necessarily limited thereto. A roller 7645 that displaces the roller 7645 is disposed on the base member 7410, and the roller 7645 is displaced in the displacement direction of the left slide member 6430 in accordance with the slide displacement of the second slide member 7640 disposed on the base member 7410. There may be.

  In the eighth embodiment, in the slide unit 8400, the second member 8433 is formed with respect to the first member 8431 by forming the outer shape of the second side pinion gear 8533d substantially the same as the outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432. The distance of relative displacement and the distance of relative displacement of the third member 8445 with respect to the second member 8433 are formed substantially the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the outer shape of the second side pinion gear 8583d is not limited to this. It is formed smaller than or larger than the outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432 so that the second member 8433 is relatively displaced with respect to the first member 8431 and the third member 8445 is relatively displaced with respect to the second member 8433. The distance may be different.

  In the eighth and ninth embodiments, when the first members 8431 and 9431, the second members 8432 and 9432, and the third members 8445 and 9445 are slid to the effect area K in the slide units 8400 and 9400, the effect area Although the case where K is invisible has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a part or all of the first members 8431, 9431, the second members 8432, 9432, and the third members 8445, 9445 are included. Alternatively, it may be made of a light transmissive material so that part or all of the effect region K can be seen through.

  In the eighth and ninth embodiments, in the slide unit 8400 and the slide unit 9400, the left side surface of the base members 8431b and 9431b and the right side surface of the base members 8434 and 9434 are substantially the same in the front-rear direction. The side surface of the base members 8434 and 9434 on the left side of the front view and the side surface of the base members 8446 and 9446 on the right side of the front view are disposed at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. The left side surface of the members 8431b and 9431b and the right side surface of the base members 8434 and 9434 may be disposed so as to overlap in the front-rear direction. The side surfaces of the members 8446 and 9446 on the right side when viewed from the front may be disposed so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

  In the first embodiment, the manner in which the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 come into contact with each other when the slide unit 400 and the projecting unit 700 are displaced to the combined (extended) position is controlled and dimensioned. Although the case where the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732 when both of them approach the reference position due to the variation has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 are displaced to the combined position, they may be positions where the two collide steadily.

  In this case, the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped quickly as much as the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped by colliding with the swinging member. That is, the rotating members 435 and 455 are displaced in accordance with the displacement of the base members 434 and 454, so that the drive transmission path from the drive motors 475 and 476 is lengthened. Therefore, when it takes time to transmit the stop operation of the drive motors 475 and 476, the displacement member 732 is brought into contact with the swinging member 732 to stop the displacement operation, so that the stop is quickly stopped at the combined (extension) position. can do.

  In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the protruding unit 700 are displaced to the combined (extended) position, the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 is used, Although the case where the rotating members 435 and 455 are further displaced has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the second members 436 and 456 disposed on the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated in the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 in the opposite direction to the first embodiment. You may overhang.

  In this case, the second members 436 and 456 are disposed in the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 so that the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating member 730 (elevating base 720) are moved up and down. The size of the pattern (character) formed by displacing the member 820 to the combined position can be easily increased.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the rotary members 435 and 455 and the rotary member 11730 (the lift base 720) are separated when the lift unit 800, the slide unit 400, and the protruding unit 11700 are displaced to the combined (extension) position. Although the case where it arrange | positions in the state was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this, The rotation members 435 and 455 and the rotation member 11730 (elevating base 720) may be arrange | positioned in the state contact | abutted. . In this case, since the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating member 11730 are disposed in contact with each other, the rotating members 435 and 455, the rotating member 11730 (the lifting base 720), and the lifting member 820 are displaced to the combined position. The size of the pattern (character) can be easily increased.

  In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the protruding unit 700 are displaced to the combined (extension) position and the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 come into contact with each other, the rotating member 730 rotates. In the above description, the case where the rotating members 435 and 455 absorb the impact when the rotating members 732 collide with the swinging member 732 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the lifting base 720 may be rotationally displaced with respect to the base member 710.

  In this case, since the rotation member 730 is connected to a transmission path that transmits driving for rotating the lifting base 720, the rotating base 720 is not easily rotated with respect to the lifting base 720. By rotating the rotating members 435 and 455, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be easily rotated when coming into contact with the swinging member 732. Therefore, it is possible to easily absorb the impact when the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732.

  In the first embodiment, when the second effect mode is formed, at least a part of the contact portion of the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640 is contacted with the rotating member 435. Although it is disposed on the front side, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the entire portion where the rotating member 435 contacts the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640. It may be arranged in such a manner as to cover the front side. Moreover, you may arrange | position in the front side of the area | region beyond this.

  In this case, the rotating member 435 makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize the contact portion between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640, so that the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotation member 435 are arranged in one pattern. Can be easily recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing as a pattern (character) of the second effect mode and losing interest.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<About the concept of the invention taking the slide unit 400 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising: a base member; a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable; and an abutting member formed so as to be able to abut against the displacement member. The first member is disposed on the member so as to be linearly displaceable, the pinion gear is rotatably disposed on the first member, the rack gear is engaged with the pinion gear, and is linearly displaceable on the first member. A second member disposed, wherein the base member includes a rack gear with which the pinion gear is engaged, and the first member of the displacement member is in contact with the contact member. Game machine A1.

  Here, a gaming machine including a base member and a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable is known (for example, JP-A-2015-57166). In this case, for example, the displacement member being displaced is brought into contact with the contact member, and the contact member is displaced together with the displacement member, or the contact member is disposed at the end of the displacement range of the displacement member. If the stop position of the displacement member extends beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions, control, etc., the displacement member is brought into contact with the contact member (the contact member functions as a stopper), etc. Are known.

  However, the conventional configuration described above has a problem that the displacement member and the contact member may be damaged when the displacement member is brought into contact with the contact member. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the displacement member is decreased in order to suppress breakage, the rendering effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is impaired.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, breakage of the displacement member and the abutting member can be suppressed while securing a presentation effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

  That is, the displacement member includes a first member disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a second member disposed on the first member so as to be linearly displaceable. Since the rack gear of the base member is engaged through a pinion gear rotatably disposed on one member, the second member is increased more than the first member when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member. In the accelerated state, it can be linearly displaced with respect to the base member. Thereby, the displacement speed of a 2nd member can be made quick and the effect accompanying the displacement can be ensured. On the other hand, the displacement member abuts the first member, whose displacement speed is slower than that of the second member, on the contact member, so that the impact at the time of contact is weakened to prevent damage to the displacement member and the contact member. can do.

  In addition, as a form of driving of the first member with respect to the base member, for example, the rack member formed on the first member meshes with a pinion gear disposed on the base member, and the pinion gear is rotated to drive the first member to the base. A member that is linearly displaced with respect to the member or a tip of an arm body whose base end is rotatably supported by the base member is connected to the first member, and the arm body is driven to rotate, whereby the first member is moved to the base member. And the like that are linearly displaced.

  The contact between the displacement member and the contact member may be performed when the displacement member is linearly displaced in a direction in which the second member is relatively displaced in the protruding direction with respect to the first member. The second member may be performed at the time of linear displacement of the displacement member in the direction in which the second member is relatively displaced in the storage direction with respect to the first member. In any case, the first member having a slower displacement speed than the second member is brought into contact with the contact member, so that the impact at the time of contact is weakened, and the displacement member and the contact member Damage can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1, the contact member is displaceably disposed on the base member, and the displaceable direction of the contact member is a straight line of the displacement member when the displacement member is contacted. A gaming machine A2 that is in a direction allowing displacement.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the contact member is displaceably disposed on the base member, and the displaceable direction of the contact member is in contact with the displacement member. Since the displacement member is in a direction that allows the displacement of the displacement member, the displacement of the displacement member is received by the abutment member and escaped, so that a buffering effect can be exerted. As a result, the displacement member and the abutment member are damaged. Can be easily suppressed.

  The direction allowing the linear displacement of the displacement member means that the displacement direction of the contact member includes at least a component of the linear displacement direction of the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the contact member need not be a linear displacement, and may be a rotational or curved (curved) displacement. Further, when the displacement of the contact member is a linear displacement, the direction of the linear displacement does not need to be parallel to the direction of the linear displacement of the displacement member, and may be inclined.

  In the gaming machine A2, the displaceable direction of the contact member is set in a direction parallel to the linear displacement direction of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, the displaceable direction of the contact member is set in a direction parallel to the linear displacement direction of the displacement member, so that the displacement member is contacted. At this time, the escape operation of the contact member can be performed smoothly. Therefore, it is possible to reliably exhibit a buffering action and to easily prevent the displacement member and the contact member from being damaged.

  The gaming machine A3 includes a guide member that guides the linear displacement of the displacement member, and the guide member guides the linear displacement of the contact member.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, the gaming machine A4 includes a guide member that guides the linear displacement of the displacement member, and the linear displacement of the contact member is guided by the guide member. Can be achieved. That is, when the first guide member for guiding the displacement member and the second guide member for guiding the abutting member are arranged side by side in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement. Therefore, the space in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the linear displacement increases, resulting in an increase in size. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A4, it is possible to improve the space efficiency and reduce the size by using one of the guide members.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the gaming machine A5 can be arranged at a position where the contact member is not in contact with the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the contact member can be disposed at a position where it does not contact the displacement member. A state where no contact is made can be formed. That is, when the displacement member is linearly displaced at a relatively high speed, it is likely that the stop position of the displacement member extends beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions and control. When the displacement member is linearly displaced at a relatively low speed, the stop position of the displacement member is easily aligned with the target position. By disposing the displacement member in a non-contact position and not contacting the both, the number of contact is reduced, the fatigue of the displacement member and the contact member due to contact is reduced, and the life of them is improved. Can be achieved.

  Any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5 includes contact member drive means for applying a drive force to the contact member, and the contact member pushes back the displacement member by the drive force of the contact member drive means. A gaming machine A6 that is formed to be displaceable in a direction.

  Here, the displacement member includes a first member disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a second member disposed on the first member so as to be linearly displaceable. By engaging the rack gear of the base member via a pinion gear rotatably disposed on the first member, the second member is moved from the first member by utilizing the linear displacement of the first member relative to the base member. Since the structure is such that the base member is linearly displaced in the accelerated state, the force required for driving becomes relatively large. In particular, during the initial operation of the displacement member (at the start of linear displacement from the stopped state), the force required for driving is maximized due to the influence of inertial force. Therefore, since the initial operation (the speed of linear displacement from the stop state) becomes slow, there is a possibility that the presentation effect accompanying the displacement is hindered.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A2 to A5, the contact member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction in which the displacement member is pushed back by the driving force of the contact member driving means. Therefore, the initial operation of the displacement member (start of linear displacement from the stopped state) can be assisted. Therefore, the displacement member can be quickly linearly displaced from the stopped state. As a result, it is possible to speed up the initial operation and improve the presentation effect accompanying the displacement.

  The direction in which the displacement member is pushed back means that the displacement direction of the contact member includes at least a component in the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the contact member need not be a linear displacement, and may be a rotational or curved (curved) displacement. Further, when the displacement of the contact member is a linear displacement, the direction of the linear displacement does not need to be parallel to the direction of the linear displacement of the displacement member, and may be inclined.

  In the gaming machine A6, when the contact member is displaced toward the direction in which the displacement member is pushed back by the driving force of the contact member driving means, the contact member contacts the first member of the displacement members. A gaming machine A7 that is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, when the contact member is displaced toward the direction in which the displacement member is pushed back by the driving force of the contact member driving means, Therefore, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the displacement member can be increased. That is, the abutting member abuts on the first member whose displacement speed is slower than that of the second member and pushes back the first member, so that an auxiliary force acts from the abutting member to the displacement member (first member). (That is, the time from the start of pushing back the stopped displacement member until the displacement member speed exceeds the contact member speed and the displacement member displacement precedes the contact member displacement). As a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the displacement member can be increased.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the first member and the contact member are linearly displaced by a rack and pinion mechanism with respect to the base member, and a gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is a rack in the contact member. A gaming machine A8 that is set to a gear ratio larger than the gear ratio of the pinion mechanism.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6 or A7, when the first member and the contact member are linearly displaced by the rack and pinion mechanism with respect to the base member, the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member Since the gear ratio is set to be larger than the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the abutting member, the displacement member can be easily linearly displaced quickly from the stopped state, and the displacement member ( The speed of the linear displacement of the second member) can be increased, and as a result, the effect of the presentation accompanying the displacement can be improved.

  That is, since the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the contact member is set to a small gear ratio, a larger driving force can be exhibited. It is possible to reliably assist the initial operation of the member (start of linear displacement from the stopped state). Therefore, the displacement member can be quickly linearly displaced from the stopped state. On the other hand, since the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is set to a large gear ratio, the linear displacement speed of the first member can be increased, and accordingly, the linear displacement of the second member is correspondingly increased. Speed can be increased.

  In addition, the gear ratio being large (small) means that the distance of linear displacement of the rack gear when the pinion gear makes one rotation is large (small).

  Here, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is reduced in order to accelerate the initial operation of the displacement member, the linear displacement speed of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation is reduced. On the other hand, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is increased in order to increase the linear displacement speed of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation, the initial operation of the displacement member is delayed. That is, it has been impossible in the past to accelerate the initial operation of the displacement member and increase the linear displacement speed of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation. By adopting a structure that pushes back the displacement member, such coexistence becomes possible for the first time.

<About the concept of the invention taking the lower unit 600 as an example>
A driving unit; a displacement member that is driven by the driving unit to be displaceable toward the first position; and a contacted member to which the displacement member displaced to the first position contacts. In the gaming machine, the gaming machine B1 is formed such that at least a component in a direction toward the abutted member among the velocity components of the displacement member decreases in the vicinity of the first position.

  Here, a pair of displacement members are provided, and the pair of displacement members can be displaced between a retracted position arranged at a predetermined interval and an abutting position (first position) where they abut each other. A gaming machine to be formed is known (for example, JP-A-2015-51160). In this type of gaming machine, for example, a pair of displacement members retracted to a retracted position are displaced in directions close to each other and brought into contact (combined) at the contact position, whereby the pair of displacement members are integrated. To produce a single character.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the pair of displacement members are brought into contact with each other at the first position, an impact is generated and, for example, the posture is unstable, for example, they are rebounded. was there. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the pair of displacement members is reduced in order to weaken the impact at the time of contact, the time until the pair of displacement members are integrated to form one character increases and extends, The effect of the production is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since at least the component in the direction toward the contacted member of the velocity component of the displacement member is reduced in the vicinity of the first position, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an impact when the displaced displacement member is brought into contact with the contacted member. Therefore, for example, the displacement member can be prevented from being rebounded from the contacted member, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

  In addition, since the decrease in at least the component in the direction toward the contacted member among the velocity components of the displacement member is formed to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, the displacement until the vicinity of the first position is reached. Since the speed of the displacement of the member can be increased, it is possible to reduce the time until the displacement member is integrated with the contacted member to form one character, and to suppress the extension. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  Further, the abutted member may be a member stopped at the first position or a member formed so as to be displaceable toward the first position. In the latter case, the abutted member is arranged at the first position before the displacement member (that is, the displacement member is positioned relative to the abutted member that has reached the first position first and is in a stopped state). Arranged at the first position substantially at the same time as the displacement member (that is, the displacement member and the abutted member being in a mutually displaced state are abutted at the first position). It may be.

  In addition, as a form in which the component in the direction toward the abutted member decreases in the vicinity of the first position, a form in which the component continuously decreases toward the first position, or a form in which the component gradually decreases toward the first position. Examples of combinations of these are exemplified.

  Further, the decrease in the component in the direction toward the contacted member means that not only the speed toward the contacted member is reduced, but also the speed in the direction toward the contacted member becomes zero, and This includes the case where the speed in the direction away from the contacted member increases (that is, the speed in the direction toward the contacted member becomes negative).

  The gaming machine B1 includes transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the transmission means is a state in which the driving state of the driving means is constant, The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that at least a component in a direction toward the abutted member is reduced in the vicinity of the first position.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the transmission means reduces the reduction in the vicinity of the first position of the component in the direction toward the abutted member among the speed components of the displacement member. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the driving means in accordance with the displacement position of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control of the driving means, thereby reducing the control cost and improving the reliability.

  Examples of the state in which the driving state is constant include a state in which the supply current or supply voltage is constant if the driving means is an electric actuator (for example, an electric motor, an electric linear actuator, etc.). The However, the change of the state in the transient response at the time of starting and stopping shall be ignored.

  In the gaming machine B2, the displacement member includes a base member that is displaceably disposed, and the transmission means is a rotation base that is rotatably connected to the base member and a position that is separated from the rotation base by a predetermined distance. And a connecting member having a connecting tip portion that is rotatably connected to the displacement member, and the connecting member is rotated about the rotation base as a rotation center in a direction to bring the connecting tip portion close to the first position. Thus, the gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced toward the first position.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the connecting member is interposed between the displacement member and the base member, and the movement locus of the connecting tip of the connecting member is an arc centered on the rotation base. That is, the displacement in the tangential direction of the arc is applied to the displacement member. In this case, since the connecting member is rotated in the direction in which the connecting tip is brought close to the first position with the rotation base as the rotation center, the first position (that is, the contacted member) of the velocity components of the displacement member. The component in the direction toward can be reduced at least in the vicinity of the first position. Thus, since the transmission means interposes the connecting member between the base member and the displacement member and displaces the displacement member via the connection member, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the transmission means The structure of the means can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine B2, the displacement member includes a base member disposed so as to be displaceable, the transmission means includes a guide groove that extends to the base member and guides the displacement member, and the displacement member includes: A guided portion that is guided along the guide groove, and the guide groove is a component in a direction toward at least the abutted member among speed components of the guided portion guided along the guide groove; Is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the transmission means includes a guide groove that extends to the base member and guides the displacement member, and the displacement member includes a guided portion that is guided along the guide groove. Of the speed components of the guided portion guided along the guide groove, at least a component in the direction toward the abutted member is formed to decrease in the vicinity of the first position. Thus, since the transmission means is provided with a guide groove for guiding the displacement member (guided portion) and displaces the displacement member along the guide groove, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the transmission means Can be simplified.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B3, the gaming machine B5 is provided with an interposed member that is connected to the base member so that one side is displaceable and is connected to the displacement member so that the other side is displaceable.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B2 to B3, the gaming machine B5 includes an interposed member that is connected to the base member so that one side is displaceable and is connected to the displacement member so that the other side is displaceable. When the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member via the transmission means and the displacement member is displaced, the displacement of the interposed member can be applied to the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member can be combined with the displacement due to the action of the transmission means and the displacement due to the action of the interposed member. Thereby, the form of the displacement of the displacement member can be complicated, and the effect of the effect due to the displacement can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine B5, the one side and the other side of the interposed member are rotatably connected to the base member and the displacement member by a shaft support.

  According to the gaming machine B6, the one side and the other side of the intervention member are rotatably connected to the base member and the displacement member by the shaft support, so when the displacement member is displaced, The other side is displaced by an arc-shaped trajectory with the center of rotation. Therefore, such an arcuate displacement (that is, a displacement that constantly changes the displacement direction along the tangential direction of the arc) can be applied from the interposed member member to the displacement member. As a result, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the displacement form of the displacement member can be complicated, and the effect of the effect by the displacement can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the transmission means is formed such that a component in a direction toward the contacted member among the velocity components of the displacement member is at least substantially 0 at the first position. A gaming machine B7 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the transmission means causes the component in the direction toward the abutted member of the velocity components of the displacement member to be at least substantially 0 at the first position. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress the occurrence of an impact when the displacement member displaced to the first position is brought into contact with the contacted member. Therefore, for example, the displacement member can be prevented from being rebounded from the contacted member, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine B7, the transmission means is formed such that a component in a direction toward the abutted member among the velocity components of the displacement member is a negative value in the first position. Game machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B7, the transmission means is formed such that the component in the direction toward the abutted member of the velocity component of the displacement member is a negative value at the first position. That is, since the displacement member has a component in a direction away from the abutted member at the first position, the displacement member is displaced when the displacement member displaced to the first position abuts the abutted member. Can be released from the abutted member, whereby the occurrence of impact can be more reliably suppressed. Therefore, for example, the displacement member can be prevented from being rebounded from the contacted member, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

  Also, if the displacement member is a negative value at the first position, even if the displacement member comes into contact with the contacted member before the displacement member reaches the first position due to variations in dimensions or control, Since the probability that the speed of the displacement member is slow (or a negative value) can be increased, the occurrence of impact can be easily suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the game machine includes a second drive unit that drives the contacted member, and a second transmission unit that transmits a driving force of the second drive unit to the contact member. The abutted member is formed so as to be displaceable toward the first position, and the second transmission means is configured so that the speed component of the abutted member is constant while the driving state of the second driving means is constant. A gaming machine B9, wherein at least a component in a direction toward the displacement member is reduced in the vicinity of the first position.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the abutted member is formed to be displaceable toward the first position, so the effect by bringing the pair of members into contact with each other Can enhance the effect. For example, the pair of members can be integrated to form a single character by displacing the member to be abutted and the displacement member in a direction close to each other and abutting (merging) at the first position.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine B9, the gaming machine B9 includes the second transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the second driving unit to the contacted member, and the second transmission unit includes at least one of the speed components of the contacted member. Since the component in the direction toward the displacement member is formed to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, the occurrence of an impact when the contacted member displaced to the first position is brought into contact with the displacement member is suppressed. it can. Therefore, for example, the abutted member and the displacement member can be prevented from being rebounded, and the attitudes of the abutted member and the displacement member can be stabilized.

  In addition, a reduction in at least the component in the direction toward the displacement member among the velocity components of the contacted member is formed to decrease in the vicinity of the first position. Since the speed of displacement of the contact member can be increased, the time required to form the single character by integrating the contacted member with the displacement member is reduced for both the contacted member and the displacement member. Thus, it is possible to suppress the extension. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  Further, the second transmission means reduces at least a component of the velocity component of the abutted member in the direction toward the displacement member in the vicinity of the first position while the driving state of the second driving unit is constant. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the second driving unit in accordance with the displacement position of the contacted member. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control of the second driving means, thereby reducing the control cost and improving the reliability.

  Note that the abutted member, the second driving unit, and the second transmission unit in the gaming machine B9 can be replaced with the displacement member, the driving unit, and the transmission unit in the gaming machines B2 to B8. Therefore, an interposed member in the gaming machine B5 or B6 may be interposed between the base member and the contacted member.

<About the concept of the invention taking the protruding unit 700 as an example>
Drive means, first and second members displaced by the drive force of the drive means, and first and second transmission means for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the first and second members, respectively. A first predetermined section in which the first driving force is loaded on the driving means, and the first drive loaded in the first predetermined section. A first suppression section in which a driving force smaller than a force is loaded on the driving means, and the second transmission means is a second predetermined section in which a second driving force is loaded on the driving means. And a second suppression section in which a driving force smaller than the second driving force loaded in the second predetermined section is loaded on the driving means, and the first transmission means can In a state where one predetermined section is formed, a small number of the first predetermined section In a state where at least a part of the second transmission means forms the second suppression section and the second transmission means forms the second predetermined section, the second transmission section forms at least a part of the second predetermined section. A gaming machine C1, wherein one transmission means forms the first suppression section.

  Here, the driving means, the first member and the second member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the first transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first member and the second member, and A gaming machine provided with a second transmission means is known (for example, JP-A-2015-53958). According to such a gaming machine, since the two members (first member and second member) can be displaced by one driving means, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. However, in the configuration in which the second member is displaced by one driving means, the driving force for driving both members is duplicated, so that the load on the driving means increases and the durability thereof is reduced. It was. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the two members (the first member and the second member) are displaced alternately (one by one), the load on the driving unit is reduced, but the state in which the two members are displaced together cannot be formed. The production effect is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the first transmission means can form the first predetermined section and the first suppression section that can reduce the load of the driving means smaller than the first predetermined section. 2 transmission means can be formed a second predetermined section and a second suppression section that can reduce the load of the driving means smaller than the second predetermined section, and in a state where the first transmission means forms the first predetermined section, In a state in which the second transmission means forms the second suppression section in at least a part of the first predetermined section and the second transmission means forms the second predetermined section, the second transmission section forms the second suppression section in at least a part of the second predetermined section. 1 transmission means forms the first suppression section, that is, when one is relatively high load, the other is relatively low load, and when the other is relatively high load, the other is The load can be relatively low. Therefore, since the load of the driving means can be distributed, the load of the driving means can be reduced and the durability can be improved.

  Furthermore, since it is not necessary to displace the first member and the second member alternately (one side at a time) and the first member and the second member can be displaced together, it is possible to reduce the load on the driving means, The production effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means is a cam member that is rotated by a driving force of the driving means, and a first member or A cam rubbing member that applies displacement to the second member, and in the first restraining section or the second restraining section, the displacement amount of the cam rubbing member per unit rotation of the cam member is the first predetermined amount. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the load of the driving means is reduced by reducing the displacement amount of the cam friction member per unit rotation of the cam member in the section or the second predetermined section.

  In the gaming machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means has a main body portion rotated by a driving force of the driving means and a crank member having a pin portion positioned eccentrically from the rotation center of the main body portion. And a crank frictional contact member that has a guide groove in which a pin portion of the crank member slides and that imparts displacement to the first member or the second member by sliding the pin portion along the guide groove; In the first restraining section or the second restraining section, the amount of displacement of the crank rubbing member per unit rotation of the crank member is determined as the unit rotation of the crank member in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the load of the driving means is reduced by reducing the amount of displacement of the crank frictional contact member.

  According to the gaming machine C2 or C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the first member or the second member is displaced by the interlocking of the cam member and the cam rubbing member or by the interlocking of the crank member and the crank rubbing member. Unit rotation of the cam member and crank member according to the outer shape of the cam member (distance from the rotation center to the outer peripheral surface (friction surface)) and the outer shape of the guide groove of the crank friction member (distance to the rotation center of the crank member) The amount of displacement of the first member or the second member around can be changed. In other words, the load of the driving means can be changed. Therefore, for example, even when the driving state of the driving means (for example, power supplied to the electric motor) is maintained constant, it is possible to change the displacement speed of the first member and the second member. As a result, in the first or first predetermined section and the first or second suppression section, a change is formed in the displacement speeds of the first member and the second member, and the first or second suppression is performed while enhancing the effect. In the section, the load on the driving means can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section, the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a displacement component upward in the gravity direction, and the first suppression section or the second predetermined section In the 2 suppression section, the gaming machine C4, wherein the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section, the displacement of the first member or the second member causes a displacement component upward in the gravity direction. In the first suppression section or the second suppression section, since the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity, the first weight or the second member is used to make the first The load of the drive means in the suppression section or the second suppression section can be made smaller than the load of the drive means in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section.

  Further, in this way, by changing the load of the driving means by utilizing the weight of the first member or the second member, for example, the interlocking of the cam member and the cam friction member or the crank member and the crank friction member When the load of the driving means is changed as in the case of using the interlock, it is not necessary to change the displacement speed of the first member or the second member, and the displacement speed of the first member or the second member is constant. The load of the driving means can be changed while maintaining the above.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the first transmission means is rubbed against the cam member rotated by the driving force of the driving means and the circumferential surface of the cam member to give displacement to the first member. A crank member having a main body portion rotated by a driving force of the driving means and a pin portion located eccentrically from a rotation center of the main body portion, and a crank member thereof. A crank rubbing member that has a guide groove in which a pin portion of the member slides and that imparts displacement to the second member by sliding the pin portion along the guide groove, and the cam member and A gaming machine C5, wherein the crank member is integrally formed.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the cam member and the crank member are integrally formed, so that the space for arranging the cam member and the crank member separately. Can be eliminated, and the size can be reduced accordingly. Moreover, compared with the case where it forms separately, the shift | offset | difference of the displacement of a 1st member and a 2nd member can be suppressed, and the precision of the synchronization of both members can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least one of the first transmission unit or the second transmission unit does not transmit the driving force of the driving unit to the first member or the second member. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that a non-transmission section for maintaining two members in a stopped state can be formed, and the displacement of the first member or the second member is started after the non-transmission section.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means does not apply the driving force of the driving means to the first member or the second member. It is possible to form a non-transmission section for maintaining the first member or the second member in the stopped state as transmission, and the displacement of the first member or the second member is started after passing through the non-transmission section. The first member or the second member can be smoothly displaced.

  That is, when starting the displacement of the first member or the second member in the stopped state, the load on the driving means increases due to the influence of the inertial force, so the initial speed of the first member or the second member is slowed down. Since it is difficult to displace smoothly, the non-transmission section for maintaining the first member or the second member in a stopped state is provided as a non-transmission of the driving force of the driving means to the first member or the second member. In the transmission means, the drive means can be idled to gain momentum, and after the momentum is applied (that is, after passing through the non-transmission section), the displacement of the first member or the second member can be started. Therefore, the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced.

  In the gaming machine C6, both the first transmission means and the second transmission means can simultaneously form the non-transmission sections, and the displacement of the first member and the second member is started after passing through each non-transmission section. A gaming machine C7 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, both the first transmission means or the second transmission means can simultaneously form a non-transmission section, and after passing through each non-transmission section, the first member and Since the displacement of the second member is started, it is not necessary to displace both the first member and the second member, and during that time, the driving means can be idled with a small load. As a result, the momentum of the driving means can be increased, and the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced.

  In the gaming machine C6, when one of the first member or the second member is maintained in a stopped state by the non-transmission section, the other displacement of the first member or the second member is a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity. A gaming machine C8 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, when one of the first member or the second member is maintained in a stopped state by the non-transmission section, the other displacement of the first member or the second member Has a displacement component downward in the gravitational direction, so that when one of the first member and the second member is maintained in the stopped state and the other is displaced, the driving force required for the displacement can be suppressed. As a result, the momentum of the driving means can be increased, and the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced. Further, since the other of the first member or the second member can be displaced while one of the first member or the second member is maintained in the stopped state, both the first member and the second member are stopped. By avoiding the state, it is possible to improve the production effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines C6 to C8, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means is a main body portion rotated by a driving force of the driving means and a pin that is eccentrically positioned from a rotation center of the main body portion A crank member having a portion, and a guide groove in which a pin portion of the crank member slides, and the pin portion slides along the guide groove to apply displacement to the first member or the second member. A section in which the guide groove of the crank friction member is formed in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member is the non-transmission section, and the pin portion of the crank member is the non-transmission section. Passing through the transmission section, the displacement of the first member or the second member is started, and the pin portion reaching the predetermined position of the guide groove changes its sliding direction and slides toward the non-transmission section. Be done If, before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission interval, the gaming machine rotation of the crank member is characterized in that it is stopped C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C6 to C8, a section in which the guide groove of the crank friction member is formed in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member is defined as a non-transmission section. The pin part of the crank member passes through the non-transmission section, the first member or the second member starts to be displaced, and the pin part reaching the predetermined position of the guide groove changes the sliding direction to the non-transmission section. In the case of sliding toward, the rotation of the crank member is stopped before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section, so that it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the driving means.

  That is, when the guide groove of the crank friction member is formed in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member, the driving force of the driving means can be made non-transmitted (a non-transmitting section can be formed). In the structure in which the part reciprocates in the guide groove, the shape of the non-transmission section is a circular arc that protrudes toward the rotation center of the crank member from the state where the pin portion passes through the non-transmission section and changes direction at a predetermined position. It becomes. Therefore, when the pin portion after the direction change passes through the non-transmission section, not only the sliding resistance increases, but also the displacement amount of the crank friction member per unit rotation of the crank member increases, and the driving means Is overloaded. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the driving means by stopping the rotation of the crank member before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section.

<Concept of Invention with Slide Unit 2400 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a base member, a slide member that is slidably disposed on the base member, and a driving means that applies a driving force to the slide member to displace the slide, the game can be rotated on the slide member A rotation member disposed on the base member, and conversion means for converting a slide displacement of the slide member relative to the base member into a rotation motion of the rotation member, wherein the conversion means rotates the rotation member. A gaming machine D1 that can form a state that is not converted into motion.

  Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a base member, a slide member that is slidably disposed on the base member, and a drive unit that applies a driving force to the slide member to displace the slide. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-236802). A gaming machine is also known in which a sliding member is provided with a rotating member and driving means for driving (rotating) the rotating member. According to this gaming machine, while the slide member is slid (linearly moved), the rotary member disposed on the slide member can be rotated, and an effect that combines the linear motion and the rotary motion is performed. Can do.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the rotating member and the driving means for rotating the rotating member are disposed on the slide member, so that the weight of the entire slide member increases, and the slide member is driven. There has been a problem that the load on the driving means for (sliding) increases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since it includes a rotating member that is rotatably arranged on the slide member, and a conversion means that converts the slide displacement of the slide member relative to the base member into the rotational movement of the rotating member. The rotation member can be rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the slide member. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose the driving means for driving (rotating) the rotating member on the slide member, the weight of the entire slide member is reduced accordingly, and the slide member is driven (slide displacement). The load on the driving means for suppressing the load can be suppressed.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine D1, the conversion means can form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotation motion of the rotation member, so only the form in which the rotation member is rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the slide member. Instead, for example, it is possible to form a configuration in which the slide member is slid and displaced while the rotating member is not rotated. Thereby, since the number of combinations of the motions (linear motion and rotational motion) of the slide member and the rotating member can be increased, the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine D1, the converting means is a rack gear formed on the base member along the slide displacement direction of the slide member, and is formed to be able to mesh with the rack gear and rotatably disposed on the slide member. A game machine D2 comprising: a pinion gear, and a release means formed so as to be able to release the engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear and disposed on the base member.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the converting means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the slide displacement direction of the slide member, and a pinion gear formed to be meshable with the rack gear and rotatably disposed on the slide member. Therefore, when the slide member is slid with respect to the base member in a state where the pinion gear is engaged with the rack gear, the slide displacement can be converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member. Moreover, since the conversion means includes release means for releasing the engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear, it is possible to form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member. That is, not only a form in which the rotating member is rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the slide member, but also a form in which the slide member is slid and displaced while the rotating member is not rotated can be formed. The number of combinations of member motions (linear motion and rotational motion) can be increased. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  In this case, the release means is provided on the base member, and it is not necessary to provide the slide member with a means for releasing the engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear, so that the weight of the entire slide member can be reduced accordingly. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the load on the driving means for driving (sliding and displacing) the slide member.

  In the gaming machine D2, the release means rotates at least a portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed along a rotation axis parallel to a tooth surface of the rack gear, thereby engaging the rack gear and the pinion gear. A gaming machine D3 characterized by being released.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D2, the release means rotates at least a portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear, Since the engagement with the pinion gear is released, the space required for such rotation (that is, the release of the engagement between the rack gear and the pinion gear) can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine D3, the gaming machine D4 is characterized in that at least one tooth of the rack gear or the pinion gear is formed in a shape in which the tooth thickness is gradually reduced toward one side in the tooth width direction.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, at least one tooth of the rack gear or the pinion gear is formed in a shape in which the tooth thickness is gradually reduced toward the one side in the tooth width direction. At least a portion where the rack gear is formed is rotated along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear, and after the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear is released, the above-described portion of the base member is rotated in the reverse direction. When the rack gear and the pinion gear are meshed, the meshing can be performed smoothly.

  In the gaming machine D2, the release means disengages the rack gear and the pinion gear by displacing at least a portion of the base member in which the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack gear. A gaming machine D5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the release means displaces at least a portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack gear, thereby reducing the rack gear and the pinion gear. Since the engagement is released, after the release, the above-described portion of the base member is displaced in the opposite direction, and the engagement can be smoothly performed when the rack gear and the pinion gear are engaged.

  In the gaming machine D1, the converting means is a rack gear formed on the base member along the slide displacement direction of the slide member, and is formed to be able to mesh with the rack gear and rotatably disposed on the slide member. And a pinion gear, and a tooth is missing at a part of the rack gear.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the slide displacement direction of the slide member, and a slide member formed to be able to mesh with the rack gear. Since the slide member is slid with respect to the base member while the pinion gear is engaged with the rack gear, the slide displacement is converted into the rotational motion of the rotary member. can do.

  In this case, since the teeth of the rack gear are partly missing, when the pinion gear passes through the part of the rack gear where the tooth is missing, a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member can be formed. . That is, according to the present configuration, the rotating member can be rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the slide member until the pinion gear reaches the portion of the rack gear where the tooth is missing, while the tooth of the rack gear is rotated. When the pinion gear reaches the portion where the is missing, the rotation of the rotating member can be continued by the inertial force by stopping the sliding displacement of the sliding member.

  Thus, according to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, not only the form in which the rotating member is rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the sliding member, but also the state in which the sliding displacement of the sliding member is stopped. A form in which the rotating member is rotated can be formed, and the number of combinations of movements (linear motion and rotational motion) of the slide member and the rotating member can be increased. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, according to the gaming machine D6, a part of the teeth of the rack gear is omitted, and the engagement of the rack gear and the pinion gear is released, and the means for releasing the engagement of the rack gear and the pinion gear is a slide member. Therefore, the weight of the entire slide member can be reduced accordingly. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load on the driving means for driving (sliding and displacing) the slide member.

  In the gaming machine D6, the teeth adjacent to the missing portion of the teeth of the rack gear have higher rigidity than other teeth.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D6, the teeth adjacent to the missing portion of the rack gear teeth are more rigid than the other teeth, so that the durability is improved. Can be planned. That is, the tooth adjacent to the missing part collides with the tooth of the pinion gear that has passed through the missing part of the rack gear, and is easily damaged. However, its rigidity is increased, thereby improving durability. be able to.

  In addition, as a means to raise rigidity, the form which enlarges the tooth width of a tooth | gear is illustrated, for example. According to this example, the rigidity can be increased without causing deterioration of the meshing property with the pinion gear.

  In the gaming machine D1, the converting means is a rack gear formed on the base member along the slide displacement direction of the slide member, and is formed to be able to mesh with the rack gear and rotatably disposed on the slide member. A pinion gear and a one-way clutch disposed in the rotation transmission path from the pinion gear or the pinion gear to the rotating member, and the one-way clutch changes between a state that allows rotation transmission and a state that blocks rotation. A gaming machine D8 characterized by being formed.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the slide displacement direction of the slide member, and a slide member formed to be able to mesh with the rack gear. Since the slide member is slid with respect to the base member while the pinion gear is engaged with the rack gear, the slide displacement is converted into the rotational motion of the rotary member. can do.

  In this case, the one-way clutch is formed so as to be able to change between a state in which rotation transmission is allowed and a state in which transmission is interrupted, so that the slide displacement is rotated by changing the one-way clutch to a state in which rotation transmission is interrupted. The state which is not converted into the rotational motion of the member can be formed. That is, the one-way clutch is allowed to transmit rotation, and the rotating member is not only rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the slide member. For example, the one-way clutch is blocked from transmitting rotation. The slide member is changed from a state in which the slide member is slid while being non-rotated, or a state in which the one-way clutch allows the transmission of rotation when the displacement of the slide member is stopped. In such a state that the rotation of the rotary member is continued by the inertial force.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, not only the rotating member is rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the sliding member but also the sliding member is slid while the rotating member is not rotated. It is possible to form a form to be displaced, or a form in which the rotating member is rotated in a state where the sliding displacement of the sliding member is stopped, and the number of combinations of the movement (linear motion and rotational motion) of the sliding member and the rotating member can be determined. Can be increased. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine D8 includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the slide member, and a driving unit that drives the displacement member and is disposed on the slide member, and the one-way clutch transmits rotation. A gaming machine D9, comprising an operation element operated to change between a state allowing and blocking, and the operation element is operated by the displaced displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D8, the gaming machine D9 includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the slide member, and a driving unit that drives the displacement member and is disposed on the slide member. In addition to the movement of the slide member and the rotation member (linear movement and rotation movement), the displacement of the displacement member can be combined, and the number of combinations can be increased. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  In this case, since the operation element of the one-way clutch is operated by the displaced displacement member, the role of performing the effect by the displacement and the role of operating the operation element can be used as the displacement member. That is, since it is not necessary to separately provide a means for operating the operating element of the one-way clutch on the slide member, the weight of the entire slide member can be reduced accordingly. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load on the driving means for driving (sliding and displacing) the slide member.

  In the gaming machine D8, the one-way clutch includes an operation element that is operated to change between a state in which rotation is allowed to be transmitted and a state in which the rotation is blocked, and the base member is provided when the slide member is slid. An gaming machine D10 comprising an engaging portion positioned on a displacement locus of the operating element, wherein the operating element is operated by the engaging portion when the slide member is slid.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D8, the base member includes an engaging portion positioned on the displacement locus when the sliding member is slid and displaced. Since the operating element is operated by the joint portion, it is not necessary to provide a means for switching the state of the one-way clutch (that is, operating the operating element) on the slide member. Can be lightened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load on the driving means for driving (sliding and displacing) the slide member.

  Note that the position where the engaging portion is disposed may be any position as long as it is on the above-described displacement locus of the operation element. For example, it may be one end or the other end on the displacement locus, or may be on the way on the displacement locus.

  The gaming machine D10 includes a second slide member that is slidably disposed on the base member, and a second drive unit that applies a driving force to the second slide member to displace the second slide member, and the second slide. The gaming machine D11 is characterized in that the position of the engaging portion can be changed along the slide displacement direction of the slide member in accordance with the slide displacement of the member.

  According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D10, the position of the engaging portion can be changed along the slide displacement direction of the slide member in accordance with the slide displacement of the second slide member. The position where the clutch state is switched, that is, the position where the rotation of the rotating member is changed from the permitted state to the restricted state or from the restricted state to the permitted state can be changed. Accordingly, the position at which the rotation state of the rotation member is changed when the slide member is slid and the position at which the rotation member is rotated while the slide displacement of the slide member is stopped is determined according to, for example, the gaming state. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the slide member, the second slide member can also be slid so that the production effect can be enhanced accordingly. And the role of changing the position of the engaging portion, it is not necessary to separately provide means for changing the position of the engaging portion. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The gaming machine D10 includes a second slide member that is slidably disposed on the base member, and a second drive unit that applies a driving force to the second slide member to displace the second slide member, and the second slide. The gaming machine D12 is characterized in that the position of the engaging portion can be changed between a position where the operating element can be operated and a position where the operating element cannot be operated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the member.

  According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D10, the position of the engaging portion can be changed between a position where the operator can be operated and a position where the operator cannot be operated in accordance with the slide displacement of the second slide member. Thus, when the slide member is slid, the form in which the state of the one-way clutch is switched and the form in which the state of the one-way clutch cannot be switched can be formed. That is, a state in which the rotation state of the rotation member is changed while the slide member is displaced from the start end to the end, and a state in which the rotation state of the rotation member is not changed while the slide member is displaced from the start end to the end. It can be formed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the slide member, the second slide member can also be slid so that the production effect can be enhanced accordingly. And the role of changing the position of the engaging portion, it is not necessary to separately provide means for changing the position of the engaging portion. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine D11 or D12, the engaging portion may be disposed on the second slide member, or may be disposed on the base member. In the latter case, the engaging portion may be disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable, and the second slide member may displace the engaging portion directly or indirectly.

<Concept of Invention with Slide Unit 8400 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a base member, and a shielding opening means capable of forming a shielding state for shielding a predetermined area of the base member and an opening state for opening the predetermined area, the shielding opening means A first member disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, a first side pinion gear rotatably disposed on the first member, and a second side rack gear engaged with the first side pinion gear. And a second member disposed on the first member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a base-side rack gear formed on the base member and meshed with the first-side pinion gear. When the two members are linearly displaced to one side, the shielding state is formed, and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to the other side opposite to the one side. Open state formed Gaming machine E1, characterized in that it is.

  Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a base member and shielding opening means that can form a shielding state that shields a predetermined region of the base member and an opening state that opens the predetermined region. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-156058, a plurality of plate-like rotating plates are rotatably arranged in a predetermined region, and the predetermined regions are shielded by directing the plate surfaces of the plurality of rotating plates to the front. On the other hand, each rotating plate is rotated 90 degrees and the plate thickness portion (side surface) is directed to the front, thereby providing a gap between the rotating plates and opening a predetermined area (forming an open state). Are) disclosed.

  However, according to the above-described conventional gaming machine, even if the open state is formed, each rotating plate that is rotated 90 degrees and has the plate thickness portion (side surface) facing the front remains in the predetermined region. Therefore, there is a problem that the area to be opened is reduced accordingly. Even if the thickness of each rotating plate is reduced, there is a limit to reducing the thickness in order to ensure the strength during rotation.

  On the other hand, a single plate-like body having the same area as the predetermined area is disposed so as to be displaceable, and the predetermined area is shielded (shielded) by displacing (arranging) the plate-like body to the predetermined area. On the other hand, there is also known a gaming machine configured to open a predetermined area (form an open state) by retracting the plate-like body from the predetermined area (displacement outside the predetermined area). Yes. According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the predetermined area can be completely opened by retracting the plate-like body from the predetermined area.

  However, in the gaming machine having such a configuration, since the plate-like body has the same area as the predetermined area, a space having the same area as the predetermined area is provided as a space for arranging the plate-like body retracted from the predetermined area. There was a problem that it was necessary and caused an increase in size. Further, since the plate-like body has the same area as the predetermined area, it takes a relatively long time to retract the plate-like body from the predetermined area or to arrange the plate-like body from the retracted position to the predetermined area. There is a problem that it is difficult to quickly switch between the shielding state and the open state.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine E1, the shielding opening means includes a first member that is disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, a first side pinion gear that is rotatably disposed on the first member, and A second member that has a second side rack gear that meshes with the first side pinion gear and that can be linearly displaced on the first member, and a base side rack gear that is formed on the base member and meshes with the first side pinion gear. The first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side so that a shielding state is formed, and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to the other side opposite to the one side. As a result, an open state is formed.

  That is, since the first member and the second member are retracted from the predetermined area by the linear displacement to the other side, the predetermined area can be opened more widely. In addition, in the state where the first member and the second member are retracted, the first member and the second member are overlapped, and accordingly, the first member and the second member retracted from the predetermined area are arranged accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size by suppressing the space for doing so.

  Further, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member. The time required for retracting the second member from the predetermined area or disposing the second member from the retracted position to the predetermined area can be shortened, and the switching between the shielding state and the open state can be performed quickly.

  The shielding state in which the predetermined region is shielded does not have to be a state in which the entire surface of the predetermined region is completely shielded by the first member and the second member, and is a region opened to a part of the predetermined region. May exist. Similarly, the open state in which the predetermined region is opened does not have to be a state in which the entire surface of the predetermined region is completely opened, and a part of the predetermined region is formed by a part of the first member or the second member. There may be a shielded area. In other words, the shielded state only needs to have a relatively large shielded area with respect to the open state, in other words, the open state only needs to have a relatively large open area with respect to the shielded state.

  In the gaming machine E1, the first member includes a first main body portion supported by the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a first displacement portion coupled to the main body portion, and the second member includes the first member A second body portion having the second side rack gear meshed with the first side pinion gear and supported by the first member so as to be linearly displaceable; and a second displacement portion coupled to the second body portion. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the first main body portion of the first member is supported by the base member outside the predetermined region.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the first member includes a first main body portion supported by the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a first displacement portion coupled to the main body portion. And a second member having a second side rack gear meshed with the first side pinion gear and supported by the first member so as to be linearly displaceable, and connected to the second body portion. When the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side or the other side because the first body portion of the first member is supported by the base member outside the predetermined region. In this case, only the trajectories of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion can be superimposed on a predetermined area. That is, the first main body portion and the second main body portion are allowed to pass outside the predetermined area, and the locus can be avoided from overlapping the predetermined area. Thereby, when the open state is formed, the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined region, and part of the first member and the second member does not remain in the predetermined region. The entire surface of the predetermined area can be completely opened.

  In the gaming machine E2, the shield opening means includes a drive gear disposed on the base member, and the first main body portion of the first member includes a first side rack gear meshed with the drive gear. The gaming machine E3, wherein the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member when the first side rack gear is driven by the drive gear.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the shield opening means includes the drive gear disposed on the base member, and the first side rack gear meshed with the drive gear is the first member. Since the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member when the first side rack gear is driven by the drive gear, the structure for linearly displacing the first member is small. Can be That is, among the spaces necessary outside the predetermined region of the base member, spaces other than the spaces necessary for retracting the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion of the first member and the second member can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means includes a second side pinion gear rotatably disposed on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear, and a second side pinion gear thereof. A gaming machine E4 comprising: a third side rack gear engaged with the third member, and a third member disposed on the second member so as to be linearly displaceable.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the second side pinion gear in which the shielding opening means is rotatably disposed on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear. And a third member disposed on the second member so as to be linearly displaceable and having a third side rack gear with which the second side pinion gear is engaged, the second member accompanies the linear displacement of the first member. When the member is linearly displaced to one side, the third member can be linearly displaced to one side along with the displacement of the second member, and the second member is moved to the other side along with the linear displacement of the first member. When the second member is linearly displaced, the third member can be linearly displaced to the other side with the displacement of the second member.

  Therefore, by linear displacement to one side of the first member, the second member and the third member, the first member, the second member and the third member can be arranged in a predetermined region to form a shielding state, By linear displacement of the first member, the second member, and the third member to the other side, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from a predetermined region (displaced outside the predetermined region). ), An open state can be formed.

  In this case, since the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined region by the linear displacement to the other side, the predetermined region can be opened more widely. Further, in the state in which the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted, the first member, the second member, and the third member are overlapped, and accordingly, the first member that has been retracted from the predetermined region accordingly. The space for arranging the member, the second member, and the third member can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced.

  In particular, according to the structure in which the predetermined region is shielded by the three members (the first member, the second member, and the third member), the predetermined region having the same area is shielded by the two members. Thus, the space for arranging the three members retracted from the predetermined area can be further reduced. This is because the area can be reduced by superimposing the three divided areas rather than superposing the two divided predetermined areas.

  Further, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member. Since the third member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is further increased, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from a predetermined region or from the retracted position. It is possible to shorten the time required for disposing in a predetermined area, and more quickly switch between the shielded state and the open state.

  In the gaming machine E4, the third member includes the third body rack gear with which the second side pinion gear is engaged, and is supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable, A gaming machine E5 comprising a third displacement portion coupled to the main body portion.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the third member has the third side rack gear meshed with the second side pinion gear and is supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable. Since the main body portion and the third displacement portion connected to the third main body portion are provided, the first member, the second member, and the third member are first displaced when linearly displaced to one side or the other side. Only the trajectories of the displacement part, the second displacement part, and the third displacement part can be overlaid on the predetermined region. That is, the first main body portion, the second main body portion, and the third main body portion are allowed to pass outside the predetermined area, and the locus can be avoided from overlapping the predetermined area. Thereby, when the open state is formed, the first displacement portion, the second displacement portion, and the third displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined region, and the first member, the second member, and the third member are retreated in the predetermined region. Since a part of the member does not remain, the entire surface of the predetermined region can be completely opened.

  In addition, it is good also as a gaming machine which further expands the technical idea (relationship of the 3rd member with respect to the 2nd member) in the gaming machine E4 or E5, and further includes a 4th member, a 5th member,.

  That is, the shield opening means has a second side pinion gear that is rotatably arranged on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear, and a third side rack gear meshed with the second side pinion gear. And a third member that is disposed on the second member so as to be linearly displaceable. The shield opening means is disposed rotatably on the nth member and meshes with the base side rack gear. An n + 1-th pinion gear and an (n + 1) -th rack gear with which the n-th pinion gear meshes, and an n + 1-th member disposed on the n-th member so as to be linearly displaceable. However, n is an integer greater than or equal to 3.)

  Similarly, the third member has a third main body portion that has a third side rack gear meshed with the second side pinion gear and is supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable, and is connected to the third main body portion. The n + 1-th body portion is extended to include a third displacement portion, and the (n + 1) th member has an (n + 1) -side rack gear meshed with the n-th pinion gear and is supported by the n-th member so as to be linearly displaceable. And an (n + 1) th displacement portion connected to the (n + 1) th body portion (where n is an integer of 3 or more).

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the shielding opening means includes a third member disposed on the second member so as to be linearly displaceable, and the first member and the second member are directed to one side or the other side. And third relative displacement utilization means for linearly displacing the third member to one side or the other side in accordance with the relative displacement between the first member and the second member when linearly displaced. A gaming machine E6.

  According to the gaming machine E6, the shield opening means is configured such that the third member disposed so as to be linearly displaceable on the second member, and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced toward one side or the other side. And third relative displacement utilization means for linearly displacing the third member to one side or the other side in accordance with the relative displacement between the first member and the second member. Therefore, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effect is achieved.

  That is, by linear displacement of the first member, the second member, and the third member to one side, the first member, the second member, and the third member can be arranged in a predetermined region to form a shielding state, By linear displacement of the first member, the second member, and the third member to the other side, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from a predetermined region (displaced outside the predetermined region). ), An open state can be formed.

  In this case, since the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined region by the linear displacement to the other side, the predetermined region can be opened more widely. Further, in the state in which the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted, the first member, the second member, and the third member are overlapped, and accordingly, the first member that has been retracted from the predetermined region accordingly. The space for arranging the member, the second member, and the third member can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced.

  As described above, according to the structure in which the predetermined region is shielded by the three members (the first member, the second member, and the third member), the predetermined region having the same area is shielded by the two members. Thus, the space for arranging the three members retracted from the predetermined area can be further reduced. This is because the area is smaller when the three divided portions are overlapped than when the predetermined area is divided into two.

  Further, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state in which the second member is accelerated more than the first member. Therefore, when the third relative displacement utilization means linearly displaces the third member with the relative displacement between the first member and the second member, the third member is increased by the speed of the second member. This linear displacement can be increased at least faster than the first member. The time required for retracting the first member, the second member, and the third member from the predetermined area or arranging the first member, the second member, and the third member from the retracted position to the predetermined area can be shortened, and the switching between the shielded state and the open state can be further performed. Can be done quickly.

<Concept of Invention with Slide Unit 400, Projecting Unit 700, and Elevating Unit 800 as Examples>
In a gaming machine including a first member and a second member formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position, the first member is moved to the extended position by being linearly displaced from the retracted position. Arranged and the second member is disposed at the extended position by being displaced in a manner including at least rotational displacement from the retracted position.

  Here, a gaming machine including a first member and a second member formed so as to be linearly displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252533). In this type of gaming machine, for example, the first member and the second member that are retracted to the retracted position are displaced to the extended position and brought into close contact or contact with each other, thereby associating and integrating them. An effect of allowing the player to visually recognize it as one character is performed.

  In this case, in order to enhance the effect, it is effective that a larger character can be formed when the first member and the second member are displaced to the extended position. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the first member and the second member in a large size.

  However, in the above-described conventional technology, the first member and the second member are structured to be displaced to the overhanging position by linear displacement, so that when the first member and the second member are enlarged, the overhanging position is reached. There is a risk of mutual interference during the displacement. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member cannot be performed at the same time, and since it is necessary to shift each displacement, it takes time until the character is formed. There was a problem that the production effect was hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the first member is arranged in the extended position by being linearly displaced from the retracted position, and the second member is displaced in a manner including at least rotational displacement from the retracted position. Thus, the first member and the second member can be prevented from interfering with each other during the displacement to the protruding position. Therefore, since the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member can be performed at the same time, it is possible to shorten the time until the character is formed and enhance the effect.

  In the gaming machine F1, the second member is arranged at the projecting position by being displaced in a combination of rotational displacement and linear displacement.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the second member is disposed in the extended position by being displaced in a combination of rotational displacement and linear displacement. Can be formed. Therefore, it can be easily suppressed that the second member interferes with the first member in the middle of the displacement to the protruding position.

  The gaming machine F2 includes a linear base member that is linearly displaced, and the second member is rotatably disposed on the linear base member so that the rotational displacement and the linear displacement are combined. A gaming machine F3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the second member is rotatably disposed on the linear base member, so that the rotational displacement and the linear displacement are provided. Since the second member is displaced in a combined manner, it is easy to suppress the second member from interfering with the first member in the middle of the displacement to the extended position, and the second member can be freely positioned at the retracted position. The degree can be increased. In other words, the second member can rotate in relation to the first member while moving to the overhanging position due to the linear displacement of the linear base member, so that the rotation is not the movement to the overhanging position but the first member. It can be used as a displacement for avoiding interference with one member, and as a result, mutual interference can be easily suppressed. Further, since the posture of the second member at the retracted position can be defined independently of the posture at the extended position, the degree of freedom of the posture of the second member at the retracted position can be increased.

  The gaming machine F2 or F3 includes a liquid crystal display device disposed in the game area, and the retreat position of the second member is set on one side or the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area, The gaming machine F4, wherein the second member is arranged in a horizontally long posture at the extended position and is arranged in a vertically long posture at the retracted position.

  Here, in the configuration in which the second member is formed in a horizontally long shape, arranged in a horizontally long posture at the extended position, and the character is formed together with the first member, a large character cannot be formed, and the production effect is sufficiently obtained. I can't show it. That is, while the game area is formed vertically long, the liquid crystal display device is formed horizontally long, so that one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area are relatively narrow, and the arrangement space of the members Is difficult to secure. Therefore, in order to prevent the second member from protruding into the display area of the liquid crystal display device at the retracted position, it is necessary to form the second member in a small size.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, the second member is arranged in a horizontally long position at the extended position, while being arranged in a vertically long position at the retracted position. Therefore, the second member can be enlarged correspondingly by effectively utilizing the arrangement space of the member on one side or the other side of the liquid crystal display device, and as a result, the character formed together with the first member at the extended position Can be made larger.

  The gaming machine F3 includes a driving unit that applies a driving force to the linear base member to perform linear displacement, and a conversion mechanism that converts the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the second member. Game machine F5.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, a driving means that applies a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace, and a conversion mechanism that converts the linear displacement of the linear base member into the rotation of the second member Since the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the second member can be synchronized, the relative positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the second member from interfering with the first member in the middle of the displacement to the protruding position.

  Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the second member, the second member can be formed in a larger size, and the character formed with the first member at the extended position can be further increased in size. . For example, even if the area is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure the space for disposing the members, such as one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area, the second member is retracted to the area. The second member can be formed in a large size while setting the position.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, a third member formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position is provided, and the third member is connected to the first member and the second member at the extended position. A gaming machine F6 that is arranged with different positions in the front-rear direction.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the gaming machine F6 includes the third member formed to be displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position, so the first member and the second member In addition, a larger character can be formed, and the production effect can be enhanced accordingly. In this case, since the third member is disposed at a position where the first member and the second member are different in the front-rear direction at the extended position, the third member does not contact the first member and the second member at the extended position. That is, when the members are brought into contact with each other in the overhang position, or when there is a possibility of contact, the third member needs to set the displacement speed in consideration of breakage due to impact at the time of contact. Since the first member and the second member are not brought into contact with each other, the displacement speed can be made relatively high. As a result, for example, it is possible to form a mode in which the later third member is displaced so as to catch up with the first member and the second member at the overhang position, and the effect of producing the character can be enhanced. .

  In the gaming machine F6, the third member includes a projecting portion that is formed by projecting to the side that has the same position in the front-rear direction as the first member and the second member.

  Here, if the front-rear direction positions of the first member, the second member, and the third member are made different, the size of the gaming machine in the front-rear direction is increased and the size is increased. If the front-rear direction dimensions of the first member, the second member, and the third member are reduced (thinned) in order to suppress such front-rear direction dimensions, it is difficult to ensure rigidity.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F7, the third member includes an overhanging portion that is formed to protrude to the same side as the first member and the second member. In addition, the longitudinal dimension of the gaming machine is reduced and the longitudinal dimension of the third member is increased to ensure its rigidity while suppressing the longitudinal dimension of the gaming machine as a sum of the second member and the third member) can do.

  Any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, comprising a contacted member disposed on the first member and in contact with a part of the second member at the extended position.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the first member includes a contacted member with which a part of the second member is contacted at the extended position. The displacement of the second member can be stopped by the contact with the contact member.

  The abutted member may be formed at a position where the second member is constantly abutted when the first member and the second member are arranged at the extended position, or the first member and When the second member is disposed at the extended position, the second member may be formed at a position where the second member comes into contact when both of them approach the reference position due to control variation or dimensional variation.

  In the gaming machine F8, the contacted member is formed to be displaceable in a direction approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is in a state in which the contacted member is separated from the first member. The gaming machine F9 is arranged at the overhang position.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F8, the abutted member is formed to be displaceable in a direction approaching and separating from the first member, and the abutting member is the first abutting member. Since it arrange | positions in the overhang | projection position in the state spaced apart from the member, it can be reliably contact | abutted with the 2nd member in an overhang | projection position. In addition, the character formed by the first member and the second member can be made larger by the amount that the contacted member is displaced in the direction away from the first member at the extended position.

  In the gaming machine F9, the abutting member is displaced in a direction approaching the first member after the first member is arranged at the extended position.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F9, the second member is displaced in the direction of approaching the first member after the first member is disposed at the extended position, A space for displacing the member can be formed. That is, when the first member is disposed at the extended position, the contacted member is separated from the first member, and the role of receiving the displacement of the second member is exhibited. The member to be abutted is displaced in the approaching direction, and the space formed along with the displacement can be utilized as the displacement space of the second member, and the effect of presentation can be enhanced by the displacement of the second member.

  In the gaming machine F8, the contacted member is formed to be displaceable in a direction approaching and separating from the first member, and the contacted member is at least in the retracted position. A gaming machine F11, characterized in that it is in a state of being close to the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F8, the abutted member is formed to be displaceable in a direction approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is at least in the retracted position. Since the contact member is in the state of being close to the first member, it is possible to reduce the arrangement space of the first member at the retracted position. Further, when the contacted member is displaced away from the first member at the extended position, the character formed by the first member and the second member can be made larger.

  In the gaming machine F11, the first member is maintained in a state in which the contacted member is close to the first member until the first member is disposed at the extended position. .

  According to the gaming machine F12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F11, the first member is maintained in a state in which the contacted member is close to the first member until the first member is arranged at the extended position. Therefore, it can suppress that a to-be-contacted member interferes with a 2nd member in the middle of the displacement to an overhanging position. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the character is formed and enhance the effect.

  In any of the gaming machines F9 to F12, two sets of the second member and the contacted member are provided, and when the second member comes into contact with the contacted member in one set, the contact Accordingly, the abutting member is formed so that the contacted member is displaced toward the second member in the other group.

  According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F9 to F12, two sets of the second member and the contacted member are provided, and in one set, the second member is applied to the contacted member. When contacted, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaced toward the second member in the other set along with the contact. For example, in one set, the second member is positioned at the reference position. When the contact member is displaced beyond and contacted with the contacted member, the contacted member can be displaced toward the second member in the other set in accordance with the contact. Therefore, when the contacted member is brought into contact with the second member in the other set, the impact caused by the contact of the second member with the contacted member in the one set is not received only by the first member. The second member in the other set can also be received. Thereby, kinetic energy can be disperse | distributed, and while being able to make it easy to stop the displacement of the 2nd member in one group, breakage of each member can be suppressed.

  In addition, as a structure in which the contacted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member with the contact in one set, for example, the displacement of the contacted member in one set is the target in the other set. A structure in which the contacted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member along with the transmission, and the displacement of the contacted member in the one set is transmitted to the first member. A structure in which the abutting member in the other set is displaced toward the second member integrally with the first member by displacing the first member with transmission, or a structure in which these are combined Is exemplified.

  Any of the gaming machines F1 to F13 includes a periodic displacement member that is in contact with the first member and the second member at the extended position and is formed to be capable of periodic displacement. Machine F14.

  According to the gaming machine F14, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines F1 to F13, the gaming machine F14 includes a periodic displacement member formed so as to be able to contact the first member and the second member at the extended position. Since the periodic displacement is formed, the first member and the second member can be periodically displaced using the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member. That is, the character formed by the first member, the second member, and the periodic displacement member can be vibrated, thereby enhancing the effect. Further, in this case, the structure is such that the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member is shared by bringing them into contact with each other, and there is no need to provide a mechanism for periodically displacing the first member and the second member. Accordingly, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Note that the first member and the second member may be in contact with each other in the overhang position, or may be in a separated state (non-contact).

  In the gaming machine F14, the periodic displacement member is arranged at a position in which the front-rear direction position in the extended position is ahead of the first member and the second member.

  According to the gaming machine F15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F14, the periodic displacement member is disposed at a position where the front-rear direction position in the extended position is forward of the first member and the second member. A member (periodic displacement member) disposed on the side closer to the person can be periodically displaced (vibrated). That is, since the character is vibrated using the member on the near side that is easily visible to the player as a vibration source, it is possible to produce an effect that makes it easy to convey the force of vibration to the player.

  In the gaming machine F14 or F15, the gaming machine F16 is characterized in that the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other in the extended position.

  According to the gaming machine F16, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F14 or F15, the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other at the extended position, so that the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member is reduced. It can be easily transmitted to the first member and the second member. Further, the first member and the second member can be periodically displaced (vibrated) in a manner different from each other without relating the first member and the second member. That is, since the first member and the second member have different configurations (the number of parts and the shape of each part), even if the same vibration is transmitted from the periodic displacement member, it is vibrated in a different manner. Therefore, the part formed by the first member and the part formed by the second member of one character can be vibrated in different manners. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced accordingly. In addition, since it is not necessary to provide a plurality of different vibration sources, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

<About the concept of the invention taking the slide unit 400, the upper unit 700 and the lower unit 800 as an example>
A first group of a plurality of displacement means formed to be displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position, and a second group of a plurality of displacement means formed to be displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position. When each displacement means of the first group is arranged at the overhang position, a first effect mode is formed by each displacement means of the first group, and the second group In each gaming machine in which the second effect mode is formed by each displacement means of the second group when each displacement means is arranged at the overhang position, the one displacement means of the first group and the A gaming machine G1 comprising a dual-purpose unit that also serves as one displacement unit of the second group.

  Here, from the first group consisting of a plurality of displacement means formed to be displaceable between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and the plurality of displacement means formed to be displaceable between the retracted position and the overhanging position. A gaming machine having a second group is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-176578).

  According to this gaming machine, when each displacement means of the first group is arranged at the extended position, each displacement means of the first group is associated (integrated) with one character (the first character When the displacement means of the second group is arranged at the overhanging position while the player recognizes it as an effect mode), each of the displacement means of the second group is associated (integrated) with another character. As the (second effect mode), an effect of causing the player to recognize is performed. That is, in the first gaming state, each displacement means of the second group is retracted to the retracted position, while each displacement means of the first group is disposed at the extended position, so that each of the first group The first character is formed in the game area by the displacement means, and in the second gaming state, each displacement means of the first group is retracted to the retracted position, while each displacement means of the second group is moved to the extended position. By arranging, the effect of forming the second character in the game area by each displacement means of the second group is performed.

  In this case, in order to enhance the effect of production, it is effective that a larger character can be formed. For that purpose, it is necessary to form each displacement means of the first group and each displacement means of the second group in a large size.

  However, when a plurality of characters (effects) are formed as in the conventional technique described above, the total number of displacement means required to form a plurality of characters is increased accordingly. Since the area (space) to be kept is limited, there is a problem that it is difficult to enlarge each displacement means. Therefore, it is difficult to enlarge each character (direction mode).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, since the dual-purpose means is used as one displacement means of the first group and one displacement means of the second group, a plurality of (first) It is possible to reduce the total number of displacement means required to form the first and second production aspects, and to increase the size of each displacement means. As a result, each effect mode (character) can be enlarged.

  In the gaming machine G1, the dual-purpose means is a position where an overhang position that is arranged when the first production mode is formed differs from an overhang position that is arranged when the second production mode is formed. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that

  Here, in the case where the first effect mode is formed and in the case where the second effect mode is formed, when the dual-purpose means is arranged at the same overhang position, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are formed. It becomes easy for the player to recognize that the common displacement means (common means) is used in the production mode, and the entertainment is disturbed. Moreover, if it is necessary to form the first production mode and the second production mode using the dual-purpose means arranged at the same position (overhang position), the degree of freedom is reduced accordingly. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape or arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the dual-purpose means forms the overhang position that is arranged when forming the first effect mode and the second effect mode. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the dual-purpose means is used in both the first production mode and the second production mode. Can be inhibited. In addition, the degree of freedom can be increased as much as the combined means can be arranged at different positions (extension positions) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode Difference (shape and arrangement position) can be easily formed.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the dual-purpose means has a posture different from a posture in forming the first presentation mode and a posture in forming the second presentation mode. Gaming machine G3.

  Here, when the first effect mode is formed and when the second effect mode is formed, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are common when the dual-purpose means has the same posture. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the displacement means (combined means) is being used and hinders interest. In addition, if it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode using the same posture combined means, the degree of freedom is reduced correspondingly, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode are reduced. It is difficult to form a difference (shape and arrangement position) from the production mode.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the dual-purpose means has a posture when forming the first performance mode and a posture when forming the second performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the dual-purpose means is also used in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode, and it is possible to prevent the entertainment from being hindered. . In addition, the degree of freedom can be increased by the amount that the dual-purpose means can be made different in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the difference between the first effect mode and the second effect mode (shape and arrangement). Can be easily formed.

  In the gaming machine G2 or G3, when the combined means is arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, the combined means is front and rear with respect to at least one displacement means of the first group. A gaming machine G4 having different directional positions and at least a portion overlapping in front view.

  Here, the dual-purpose means has different overhang positions or (and) different postures when the first effect mode is formed and when the second effect is formed, and forms a plurality of stop states. Since it is necessary, the control or structure becomes complicated, and accordingly, the stop state (arrangement position or (and) posture) tends to vary. In this case, in the structure in which the dual-purpose means abuts on the one displacement means in the extended position (at least a part of the front-rear direction position matches), if the position and orientation of the dual-purpose means do not reach the target position, While a gap is formed between the displacement means and the position and orientation of the dual-purpose means exceed the target position, one displacement means is pushed out to cause a displacement. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the relationship with one displacement means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2 or G3, when the dual-purpose means is arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first production mode, Since at least one of the displacement means has a different position in the front-rear direction and at least partly overlaps in front view, even if the stop state (extension position or (and) posture) varies, It is possible to easily maintain the relationship between the displacement means and the combined means. That is, by overlapping partly in front view, even if the displacement of the dual-purpose means is insufficient, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap with the single displacement means, and the dual-purpose position can be Even when the displacement of the means becomes excessive, it is possible to suppress the displacement of one displacement means caused by being pushed out. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the relationship between the one displacement means and the dual-purpose means.

  In the gaming machine G4, the one displacing means and the other displacing means of the first group are brought into contact with each other when arranged at the projecting position when forming the first effect mode. A gaming machine G5 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in the gaming machine G4, when one displacement means and the other displacement means of the first group are arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, Since they are brought into contact with each other, the one displacement means and the other displacement means can be associated (integrated) so that the player can easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

  In this case, as described above, the dual-purpose unit is likely to vary in the stopped state (the extended position or (and) posture), and the dual-purpose unit is in the extended position when forming the first effect mode. In a structure that is in contact with one displacement means (at least part of the position in the front-rear direction coincides), if the position and orientation of the dual-purpose means do not reach the target position, there is a gap between the one displacement means Is formed, and association (integration) is inhibited. Similarly, even if the arrangement position and posture of the dual-purpose means exceed the target position, the one displacement means is pushed out to cause a positional shift, so that association (integration) is hindered. That is, when one displacement means and the other displacement means in the first group are brought into contact with each other at the extended position, the configuration of the gaming machine G4 (the position in the front-rear direction is different and the front view is different). Is particularly effective.

  In the gaming machine G5, when the dual-purpose means is disposed at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, the dual-purpose means is positioned on the front side in the front-rear direction with respect to the one displacement means and the other displacement means. The gaming machine G6 is characterized in that the one displacement means and the other displacement means overlap each other in a front view with respect to a portion where they are in contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G5, when the dual-purpose means is arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, it is more than one displacement means and the other displacement means. For example, one displacement means or (and / or) another displacement means is located on the front side in the front-rear direction and overlaps in a front view with respect to a portion where the one displacement means and the other displacement means abut against each other. When a deviation occurs in the target position and a gap is formed between the two displacement means, the gap is shielded by the dual-purpose means so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the gap. As a result, it is possible to prevent the relationship between one displacement means and the other displacement means from being inhibited, and it is possible to easily maintain the relationship between both displacement means and the combined means.

  In any of the gaming machines G2 to G6, a linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the dual-purpose means is rotatably arranged on the linear base member, so that the rotational displacement and the linear displacement are combined. And the extended position of the combined means disposed when forming the first effect aspect, and the extended position of the combined means disposed when forming the second effect aspect. Are different positions, and the posture of the dual-purpose means when forming the first production mode is different from the posture of the dual-purpose unit when forming the second production mode. A gaming machine G7 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G2 to G6, a linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the dual-purpose means is rotatably disposed on the linear base member, so that rotational displacement and linear Since it is displaced in a mode in which displacement is combined, the degree of freedom of the overhang position and posture when forming the first production mode or the second production mode can be increased.

  In the gaming machine G7, a gaming machine G8 is characterized in that a position in the front-rear direction of one of the displacement means in the first group is set between the linear base member and the combined means.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G7, the longitudinal position of one of the displacement means in the first group is set between the straight base member and the writing means. The front and rear direction positions of the one displacing means and the dual-purpose means can be made closer to each other while the means is positioned on the front side and easily visible to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character by associating (integrating) one displacement means with the dual-purpose means.

  In the gaming machine G8, in a state where one displacement means and the combined means of the first group are disposed at the retracted position, the one displacement means is disposed at a position overlapping the linear base member in a front view. A gaming machine G9.

  According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G8, in the state where one displacement means and dual-purpose means of the first group are arranged at the retracted position, the one displacement means and the linear base member are Since the first displacement means and the linear base member (combined means) are displaced to the overhanging position so as to form the first effect mode, the one displacement means is a straight line. It can suppress contacting with the side of a base member.

  In the gaming machine G9, in a state where the other displacement means and the combined means of the first group are disposed at the retracted position, the other displacement means is disposed at a position that does not overlap the linear base member when viewed from the front. In the middle of the displacement of the other displacing means and the combined means toward the extended position, the other displacing means is disposed at a position overlapping the linear base member in a front view, and the linear base member is A gaming machine G10, wherein at least the area where the other displacement means overlaps in the front view has a smaller size in the front-rear direction than the area where the one displacement means overlaps in the front view.

  According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G9, in the state where the other displacing means and the combined means of the first group are arranged at the retracted position, the other displacing means faces the straight base member. Arranged at a position where it does not overlap in view, and other displacement means and dual-purpose means are displaced toward the extended position, the other displacement means is arranged at a position overlapping the linear base member in front view, and the linear base member Since at least the area where the other displacement means overlap in the front view has a smaller size in the front-rear direction than the area where the one displacement means overlaps in the front view, the other displacement means is formed to form the first effect mode. When the linear base member (combined means) is displaced to the overhang position, it can be suppressed that other displacement means abut on the side surface of the linear base member.

  The gaming machine G10 includes a driving unit that applies a driving force to the linear base member to perform linear displacement, and a conversion mechanism that converts the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the dual-purpose unit, and the conversion mechanism includes: The gaming machine G11, wherein the one of the linear base members is disposed in a region overlapping the front view at the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine G11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G10, a driving means that applies a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace, and a conversion mechanism that converts the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the dual-purpose means, Since the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the dual means are synchronized, the relative positional accuracy (posture) of the dual means relative to the linear base member can be increased. Therefore, the displacement means and the dual-purpose means can be associated (integrated) so that the player can easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

  Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the combined means, the shared means can be formed in a larger size, and the character formed at the extended position can be further increased in size. For example, even if the area is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure the space for disposing the members, such as one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area, the common means material can be retracted to the area. The dual-purpose means can be formed in a large size while setting the position.

  In this case, the conversion mechanism is arranged in a region where one displacement means of the linear base member overlaps in the front view at the retracted position, and accordingly, another region of the linear base member (the conversion mechanism is not arranged). The dimension in the front-rear direction of the area can be reduced. Therefore, when the other displacement means and the linear base member (combined means) are displaced to the extended position, it is possible to suppress the other displacement means from coming into contact with the side surface of the linear base member.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, and G1 to G11, the gaming machine is a slot machine. . Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, and G1 to G11, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine K2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, and G1 to G11, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine A gaming machine K3 characterized by being. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (liquid crystal display device)
400 slide units (part of the first county, part of the second county)
410, 2410, 3410, 6410, 7410, 8410 Base member 6411 Protrusion (engagement portion)
412 Base side rack gear (rack gear)
413, 4413 Left rotation transmission rack gear 4413a, 4414a Notch (missed portion)
4413b, 4414b Small tooth part (tooth adjacent to missing part)
414, 4414 Right rotation transmission rack gear 420 Sliding bar member (guide member)
430, 2430, 5430, 6430, 7430, 8430, 9430 Left slide member (displacement member, slide member)
431, 8431 1st member (1st main-body part)
431a First side rack gear (part of rack and pinion mechanism)
8431b Base member (first displacement portion)
432 1st side pinion gear (pinion gear)
432a Second side rack gear (part of rack and pinion mechanism)
433, 8433, 9433 Second member (second main body)
433a Second side rack gear (rack gear)
8433d Second side pinion gear 434 Base member (straight base member)
8434, 9434 Base member (second displacement portion)
435 Rotating member (combined means)
435, 454, 5435, 5455 Rotating member (second member)
437a, 457a, 2437a, 2457a Transmission gear (pinion gear)
5439 One-way clutch 5439a Switching plate (operator)
9444 Wire (relative displacement utilization means)
8445 3rd member (3rd main-body part)
8445a 3rd side rack gear 8446, 9446 Base member (3rd displacement part)
450, 2450, 5450, 6450, 7430 Right slide member (contact member, slide member)
454 Base member (Linear base member)
455 Rotating member (second member)
471 Left drive gear (part of rack and pinion mechanism)
472 Right drive gear (part of rack and pinion mechanism)
476 Right drive motor (contact member drive means)
475 Left drive motor (drive means)
476 Right drive motor (drive means)
500 upper unit (part of 2nd county)
530 Upper displacement member (contact member)
600 Lower unit (part of second group)
610 Base member 630 Drive arm (connection member)
631 Shaft support hole (rotating base)
633 Connection hole (connection tip)
640 Lower displacement member (displacement member)
700 protruding units (part of the first county)
7460 2nd slide member 7465 Roller (engagement part)
7466 motor (second drive means)
650 Connecting arm (intermediate member)
672 Drive motor (drive means)
720 Lift base (part of the first member)
730 Rotating member (part of first member)
732 Swing member (first member or second member, non-contact member)
733 Interposing member (cam rubbing member)
733c Sliding wall (part of first transmission means or part of second transmission means)
735 Projection member (second member or first member, crank friction member)
735b Sliding hole (part of second transmission means or part of first transmission means, guide groove)
735b1 curved portion (non-transmission section)
761 Driving body (cam member, crank member)
761b Cam portion (part of first transmission means or part of second transmission means)
761c Sliding pin (part of second transmission means or part of first transmission means, pin portion)
763 Drive motor (drive means)
800 lifting unit (part of 2nd county)
820 Lifting member (third member, periodic displacement member)
871 Second slide member (overhang)
Vv upward speed component (component in the direction toward the abutted member)

Claims (3)

Drive means, first and second members displaced by the drive force of the drive means, and first and second transmission means for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the first and second members, respectively. A gaming machine comprising means,
The first transmission means has a first predetermined section in which a first driving force is loaded on the driving means and a driving force smaller than the first driving force loaded in the first predetermined section. A first suppression section loaded on the
The second transmission means has a second predetermined section in which a second driving force is loaded on the driving means and a driving force smaller than the second driving force loaded in the second predetermined section. A second suppression section loaded on the
In a state where the first transmission means forms the first predetermined section, the second transmission means forms the second suppression section in at least a part of the first predetermined section, and the second transmission means In a state where the second predetermined section is formed, the first transmission means forms the first suppression section in at least a part of the second predetermined section.   In the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section, the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a displacement component upward in the direction of gravity, and in the first suppression section or the second suppression section, the first member or The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the displacement of the second member includes a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity.   The first transmission means includes a cam member that is rotated by a driving force of the driving means, and a cam friction member that is frictionally contacted with a peripheral surface of the cam member to impart displacement to the first member, The second transmission means includes a crank part having a main body part rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a pin part located eccentrically from the rotation center of the main body part, and a guide groove in which the pin part of the crank member slides And a crank frictional contact member that applies displacement to the second member by sliding the pin portion along the guide groove, and the cam member and the crank member are integrally formed. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that.

Images